Toyota 2018 Highlander Owner's Manual

Toyota 2018 Highlander Owner's Manual
1
QUICK GUIDE
11
2
BASIC FUNCTION
31
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
73
4
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
167
5
INFORMATION
181
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
189
7
PHONE
259
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
301
9
Entune App Suite
367
INDEX
381
About the following equipment, see the “Owner’s Manual”.
• Fuel consumption
• Energy monitor (HIGHLANDER HYBRID)
• Vehicle customization settings
1
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Introduction
NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL
This manual explains the operation of this system. Please read this manual
carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times.
The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of this system differ
depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map data
available at the time of producing this document.
Please be aware that the content of this manual may be different from this system in some cases, such as when the system’s software is updated.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (ENTUNE PREMIUM AUDIO)
The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global
Positioning System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using
these signals and other vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating a desired destination.
The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present
starting location to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you
to a destination that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses
AISIN AW maps. The calculated routes may not be the shortest nor the least
traffic congested. Your own personal local knowledge or “short cut” may at
times be faster than the calculated routes.
The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow
you to easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination
is not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersection
close to it and the system will guide you there.
The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructions will announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when
approaching an intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your
eyes on the road and are timed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.
Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position depends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle
condition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of the
system, refer to page 363.
2
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention
with the following marks.
WARNING
● This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk
of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
● This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in
order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.
SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
3
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
No.
Name
Description
Operational
Outlines
An outline of the operation is explained.
Main Operations
The steps of an operation are explained.
Related Operations
A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.
Information
Useful information for the user is described.
■INFORMATION FOR HYBRID VEHICLES IS WRITTEN IN BRACKETS
NEXT TO THE INFORMATION FOR GASOLINE VEHICLES
Different writing styles for gasoline and hybrid vehicles
Example
When the engine*1 <power>*2 switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON*1 <ON>*2 mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin operating.
*1: Vehicles with gasoline engine
*2: Vehicles with hybrid system
4
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
SAFETY INSTRUCTION
(ENTUNE AUDIO PLUS)
To use this system in the safest possible
manner, follow all the safety tips shown
below.
Do not use any feature of this system to
the extent it becomes a distraction and
prevents safe driving. The first priority
while driving should always be the safe operation of the vehicle. While driving, be
sure to observe all traffic regulations.
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn
how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire manual to make
sure you understand the system. Do not
allow other people to use this system until
they have read and understood the instructions in this manual.
For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed.
WARNING
● For safety, the driver should not operate
the system while he/she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic
may cause an accident.
SAFETY INSTRUCTION
(ENTUNE PREMIUM AUDIO)
To use this system in the safest possible
manner, follow all the safety tips shown
below.
This system is intended to assist in reaching the destination and, if used properly,
can do so. The driver is solely responsible
for the safe operation of your vehicle and
the safety of your passengers.
Do not use any feature of this system to
the extent it becomes a distraction and
prevents safe driving. The first priority
while driving should always be the safe operation of the vehicle. While driving, be
sure to observe all traffic regulations.
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn
how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire manual to make
sure you understand the system. Do not
allow other people to use this system until
they have read and understood the instructions in this manual.
For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed. Only
when the vehicle is not moving, can the
destination and route selection be done.
5
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
WARNING
● For safety, the driver should not operate
the system while he/she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic
may cause an accident.
● While driving, be sure to obey the traffic
regulations and maintain awareness of
the road conditions. If a traffic sign on
the road has been changed, route guidance may not have the updated information such as the direction of a one way
street.
While driving, listen to the voice instructions as much as possible and glance at
the screen briefly and only when it is safe.
However, do not totally rely on voice guidance. Use it just for reference. If the system cannot determine the current position
correctly, there is a possibility of incorrect,
late, or non-voice guidance.
The data in the system may occasionally
be incomplete. Road conditions, including
driving restrictions (no left turns, street closures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,
before following any instructions from the
system, look to see whether the instruction
can be done safely and legally.
This system cannot warn about such
things as the safety of an area, condition of
streets, and availability of emergency services. If unsure about the safety of an area, do not drive into it. Under no
circumstances is this system a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgement.
Use this system only in locations where it
is legal to do so. Some states/provinces
may have laws prohibiting the use of video
and navigation screens next to the driver.
6
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
QUICK GUIDE
3. OTHER SETTINGS ......................... 59
GENERAL SETTINGS ........................... 59
VOICE SETTINGS ................................. 66
1. BASIC FUNCTION........................... 12
VEHICLE SETTINGS ............................. 67
BUTTONS OVERVIEW ......................... 12
DRIVER SETTINGS............................... 68
“Apps” SCREEN .................................... 14
MAINTENANCE ..................................... 69
HOME SCREEN .................................... 16
2. QUICK REFERENCE....................... 20
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
“Setup” SCREEN ................................... 20
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION ............ 22
1. BASIC OPERATION ....................... 76
REGISTERING HOME .......................... 22
QUICK REFERENCE............................. 76
REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS.................................. 24
SOME BASICS....................................... 77
2. RADIO OPERATION....................... 83
OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING
THE ROUTE........................................ 26
AM/FM RADIO ....................................... 83
SETTING HOME AS THE
DESTINATION .................................... 27
INTERNET RADIO ................................. 99
XM Satellite Radio.................................. 93
4. FUNCTION INDEX........................... 28
3. MEDIA OPERATION..................... 100
FUNCTION INDEX ................................ 28
CD ........................................................ 100
USB MEMORY..................................... 103
2
BASIC FUNCTION
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE
OPERATION .................................. 32
iPod ...................................................... 107
Bluetooth® AUDIO................................ 111
AUX ...................................................... 116
INITIAL SCREEN................................... 32
4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE
CONTROLS ................................. 118
CAPACITIVE TOUCH SWITCHES........ 34
STEERING SWITCHES ....................... 118
TOUCH SCREEN GESTURES ............. 35
5. SETUP........................................... 120
TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION ............ 36
HOME SCREEN OPERATION .............. 37
ENTERING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN
OPERATION ....................................... 38
SCREEN ADJUSTMENT....................... 41
LINKING MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY AND THE SYSTEM............. 43
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS.................... 44
REGISTERING/CONNECTING
Bluetooth® DEVICE............................. 44
SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS ............. 51
8
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO SETTINGS ............................... 120
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM............ 122
OPERATING INFORMATION .............. 122
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM OPERATION ................ 132
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM FEATURES ....................... 132
4
1
PERIPHERAL MONITORING
SYSTEM
PLAYING A Blu-ray Disc™ (BD)
AND DVD DISCS .............................. 145
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM ...................................... 190
PLAYING AN AUDIO CD AND
MP3/WMA DISCS ............................. 158
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ....... 190
PLAYING AN SD CARD ...................... 161
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ................................ 192
USING THE VIDEO MODE ................. 166
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW .......... 197
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION ................................ 168
TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR ......................................... 198
ESTIMATED COURSE LINE
DISPLAY MODE ............................... 203
CASUAL
SPEECH RECOGNIZATION ............ 174
PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE
DISPLAY MODE ............................... 205
COMMAND LIST ................................. 175
TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR PRECAUTIONS............... 207
MOBILE ASSISTANT .......................... 178
INFORMATION
1. USEFUL INFORMATION............... 182
RECEIVING WEATHER
INFORMATION ................................. 182
RECEIVING TRAFFIC MAP
INFORMATION ................................. 184
DATA SERVICES SETTINGS ............. 185
Driver Easy Speak ............................... 186
3
4
5
6
7
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW .......... 212
3. PANORAMIC VIEW
MONITOR .................................... 214
PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR ........... 214
CHECKING AROUND THE
VEHICLE ........................................... 221
CHECKING THE FRONT AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE .................. 222
CHECKING THE SIDES OF THE
VEHICLE ........................................... 225
CHECKING THE REAR AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE .................. 228
MAGNIFYING FUNCTION................... 235
PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
PRECAUTIONS ................................ 236
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW .......... 247
4. INTUITIVE PARKING
ASSIST ........................................ 250
INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST............. 250
INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
SETTING ........................................... 256
9
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR .................................... 198
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM.............. 168
2. MOBILE ASSISTANT
OPERATION ................................ 178
5
6
8
9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7
PHONE
4. MEMORY POINTS ........................ 344
MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS............ 344
1. PHONE OPERATION
(HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR
CELLULAR PHONES) ................. 260
5. SETUP........................................... 353
QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 260
TRAFFIC SETTINGS ........................... 357
SOME BASICS .................................... 261
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM ...................................... 363
CALLING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE.............................................. 265
DETAILED NAVIGATION
SETTINGS......................................... 353
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM)........................................... 363
RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE.............................................. 271
MAP DATABASE VERSION AND
COVERED AREA .............................. 365
TALKING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE.............................................. 272
Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE
FUNCTION........................................ 275
2. SETUP ........................................... 280
9
Entune App Suite
PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS .......... 280
1. Entune App Suite
OVERVIEW.................................. 368
3. WHAT TO DO IF... ........................ 292
Entune App Suite SERVICE................. 368
TROUBLESHOOTING......................... 292
2. Entune App Suite
OPERATION................................ 373
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1. BASIC OPERATION...................... 302
QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 302
MAP SCREEN OPERATION ............... 305
Entune App Suite ................................. 373
3. SETUP........................................... 380
Entune App Suite SETTINGS .............. 380
INDEX
MAP SCREEN INFORMATION ........... 310
TRAFFIC INFORMATION.................... 314
2. DESTINATION SEARCH............... 317
DESTINATION SEARCH
SCREEN ........................................... 317
SEARCH OPERATION........................ 319
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ......... 329
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE....................... 333
ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN ............ 333
TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE
PROMPTS......................................... 338
EDITING ROUTE................................. 339
10
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.................... 382
1
1
QUICK GUIDE
2
1
BASIC FUNCTION
3
1. BUTTONS OVERVIEW ................. 12
4
2. “Apps” SCREEN .......................... 14
3. HOME SCREEN ............................ 16
5
STATUS DISPLAY................................. 18
2
6
QUICK REFERENCE
1. “Setup” SCREEN ......................... 20
3
7
NAVIGATION OPERATION
8
1. REGISTERING HOME .................. 22
2. REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS ......................... 24
3. OPERATION FLOW:
GUIDING THE ROUTE................ 26
4. SETTING HOME AS THE
DESTINATION ............................ 27
4
FUNCTION INDEX
1. FUNCTION INDEX ........................ 28
11
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
9
1. BASIC FUNCTION
1. BUTTONS OVERVIEW
12
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC FUNCTION
No.
Page
By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the selected
functions.
35, 36
Insert a disc into this slot. The CD player turns on immediately.
Press to play/pause.
Turn to select a radio station or skip to the next or previous track/file.
Press to access the Bluetooth® hands-free system.
*
1
QUICK GUIDE
Function
79
83, 100,
103, 107,
111, 116
83, 93, 100,
103, 107,
111
260
Press the “ ” or “ ” button to seek up or down for a radio station or to
access a desired track/file.
83, 93, 100,
103, 107,
111
MAP card slot
Do not eject the microSD card, as doing so may deactivate the navigation system.
366
Press to display the “Apps” screen.
14
Press to display the home screen.
16, 37
Press to access the audio/visual system. The audio/visual system
turns on in the last mode used.
76, 78
Press to turn the audio/visual system on and off, and turn it to adjust
the volume.
78
Press to eject a disc.
79
*: Entune Premium Audio only
13
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC FUNCTION
2. “Apps” SCREEN
Press the “APPS” button to display the “Apps” screen.
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
14
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC FUNCTION
No.
Function
Page
76
Select to display the hands-free operation screen.
260
Select to display the “Message Inbox” screen.
275
Select to display the fuel consumption screen.
“Owner’s
Manual”
*
If a turn-by-turn navigation application has been downloaded to a connected phone, the application will be displayed and can be used.
For details, refer to http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
*
Select to display weather information.
1
QUICK GUIDE
Select to display the audio control screen.
⎯
182
Select to reorder the applications.
375
• Select the desired application then
or
to reorder.
*
Select to display the traffic map information.
184
*
Select to update the applications.
374
Select to display the “Setup” screen.
20
Select to display the map screen.
302
Select to turn the Driver Easy Speak on/off.
186
Select to display traffic information.
314
Select to display the “Maintenance” screen.
69
Select to display the application screen.
368
*
*
*: Available in the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska
INFORMATION
● When there are two pages, select
or
to change the page.
15
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC FUNCTION
3. HOME SCREEN
Press the “HOME” button to display the home screen.
The home screen can display multiple information screens, such as the audio system screen, hands-free screen and navigation screen, simultaneously. When
hands-free mode is selected, it is possible to make a call on the home screen if the
desired phone number is registered to one of the 4 displayed buttons. In order to
register the contact, select and hold the desired button and register the desired
contact by obey displayed messages on the screen. (→P.270)
When a screen is selected, the selected screen is switched to a full-screen display.
The home screen can be set to either a three-way split screen or a two-way split
screen.
For details about setting the home screen: →P.37
Three-way split screen
16
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC FUNCTION
Two-way split screen
1
QUICK GUIDE
No.
Function
Page
Displays the condition of the Bluetooth® connection
18
Select to display the “Setup” screen.
20
 Entune Audio Plus only: Turn-by-turn navigation application screen can be displayed.
17
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC FUNCTION
STATUS DISPLAY
The condition of the Bluetooth® connection, as well as the level of reception and
the amount of cellular phone battery charge left, are displayed on the status display.
No.
Indicators
Conditions
(Gray)
No connection
The condition of
the
Bluetooth®
connection
The level of reception
18
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Poor
(Blue)
Good
• An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built into the instrument panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may deteriorate and the system may not function when a Bluetooth® phone
is used in the following conditions and/or places:
The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when
it is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box).
The cellular phone is touching or is covered with metal materials.
• Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of the
Bluetooth® connection is good.
Poor
Excellent
• The level of reception does not always correspond with the level
displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be
displayed depending on the phone you have.
When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place
inaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.
• “Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area. While roaming, display “Rm” top-left on the icon.
• The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type of
phone you have.
1. BASIC FUNCTION
No.
Indicators
Conditions
The amount of
battery
charge
left
Empty
Full
• The amount displayed does not always correspond with the
amount displayed on the Bluetooth® device.
The amount of battery charge left may not be displayed depending on the type of the Bluetooth® device connected.
This system does not have a charging function.
1
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
QUICK GUIDE
19
2. QUICK REFERENCE
1. “Setup” SCREEN
The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. Press the “APPS” button, then
select “Setup” to display the “Setup” screen.
Entune Audio Plus
Entune Premium Audio
20
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. QUICK REFERENCE
No.
Page
Select to change the selected language, operation sound, automatic
screen change settings, etc.
59
Select to customize the home screen.
37
Select to set the voice settings.
66
Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, etc.
41
Select to link the driver’s cellular phone settings. (audio presets, language, etc.)
68
Select to set audio settings.
120
Select to set the phone sound, contacts, message settings, etc.
280
Select to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth® audio devices.
51
Select to turn the screen off. To turn it on, press any button.
⎯
Select to set vehicle information.
*
1
QUICK GUIDE
Function
202, 256
Select to change the phone data plan pop-up message timing.
(“Connected Navigation” is downloadable application via smartphones
using a cellular data connection.)
⎯
Select to set memory points (home, preset destinations, address book
entries, areas to avoid), navigation details or to delete previous destinations.
344, 353
*
Select to set Entune App Suite settings.
380
*
Select to set data services settings.
185
*
Select to set traffic information.
357
Select to set Driver Easy Speak settings.
186
*: Available in the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska
21
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
1. REGISTERING HOME*
1
2
3
Press the “APPS” button.
4
Select “Go Home”.
5
Select “Yes”.
6
There are different kinds of methods to search for your home.
(→P.317)
Select “Navigation”.
Select “Dest.”.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
22
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
7
Select “Enter”.
1
QUICK GUIDE
8
Select “OK”.
Registration of home is complete.
Registering home in a different way
→P.345
Editing the name, location, phone number and icon
→P.345
Setting home as the destination
→P.320
23
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
2. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS*
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
Select “Navigation”.
3
4
Select one of the preset destination buttons.
5
Select “Yes”.
6
There are different kinds of methods to search for a destination.
(→P.317)
Select “Dest.”.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
24
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
7
Select “Enter”.
1
Select a position for this preset
destination.
9
Select “OK”.
QUICK GUIDE
8
Registration of preset destinations is
complete.
Registering preset destinations in a different way
→P.346
Editing the name, location, phone number and icon
→P.347
Setting preset destinations as the destination
→P.320
25
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
3. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE*
1
2
Press the “APPS” button.
Select “Navigation”.
5
Select “Go”.
6 Select “OK”.
Selecting routes other than the one recommended. (→P.329)
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via
voice guidance.
3
Select “Dest.”.
4
There are different kinds of methods to search for a destination.
(→P.317)
*: Entune Premium Audio only
26
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. NAVIGATION OPERATION
4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION*
1
Press the “APPS” button.
5
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via
voice guidance.
2
Select “Navigation”.
3
Select “Dest.”.
4
Select “Go Home”.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
27
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1
QUICK GUIDE
Select “OK”.
Selecting routes other than the one recommended. (→P.329)
4. FUNCTION INDEX
1. FUNCTION INDEX
Map*
Displaying maps
Page
Viewing the map screen
302
Displaying the current position
305
Viewing the current position vicinity map
309
Changing the scale
305
Changing the map orientation
306
Displaying map information
310
Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination
333
Selecting the map mode
307
Displaying traffic information
314
Searching for destinations
Page
Searching for the destination
319
Changing the search area
320
*: Entune Premium Audio only
Route guidance*
Before starting or during route guidance
Page
Starting route guide
329
Editing the route
339
Viewing the entire route map
334
Pausing guidance
332
Adjusting route guidance volume
66
Deleting the destination
340
Address book
Page
Registering address book entries
348
Marking icons on the map
349
*: Entune Premium Audio only
28
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. FUNCTION INDEX
Useful functions
1
Information
69
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Registering/connecting Bluetooth® phone
®
Making a call on a Bluetooth phone
®
Receiving a call on the Bluetooth phone
Voice command system
Operating the system with your voice
Peripheral monitoring system
Viewing behind the rear of the vehicle
Viewing around the vehicle
QUICK GUIDE
Displaying vehicle maintenance*
Page
Page
44
265
271
Page
168
Page
190, 198
214
*: Entune Premium Audio only
29
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. FUNCTION INDEX
30
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
1
BASIC FUNCTION
2
1
BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE
OPERATION
2. SETTING Bluetooth®
DETAILS ..................................... 51
3
“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN.................. 51
1. INITIAL SCREEN ........................... 32
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE ............................................... 52
2. CAPACITIVE TOUCH
SWITCHES .................................. 34
DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE ......... 53
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE ............................................... 54
3. TOUCH SCREEN GESTURES ...... 35
EDITING THE Bluetooth®
DEVICE INFORMATION ..................... 56
4. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION .... 36
4
5
6
“System Settings” SCREEN................... 57
5. HOME SCREEN OPERATION ...... 37
6. ENTERING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN
OPERATION ................................ 38
3
7
OTHER SETTINGS
1. GENERAL SETTINGS .................. 59
ENTERING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS .......................................... 38
GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN ........... 59
LIST SCREEN ....................................... 38
2. VOICE SETTINGS......................... 66
VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN ................. 66
7. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ............... 41
3. VEHICLE SETTINGS .................... 67
8. LINKING MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY AND THE
SYSTEM....................................... 43
2
Bluetooth® SETTINGS
4. DRIVER SETTINGS ...................... 68
MANUALLY SELECT LINKED
SETTINGS .......................................... 68
5. MAINTENANCE ............................ 69
1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING
Bluetooth® DEVICE .................... 44
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME.......... 44
REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO
PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME ........ 45
PROFILES ............................................. 46
CERTIFICATION ................................... 48
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
31
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
9
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
1. INITIAL SCREEN
Vehicles without a smart key system
When the engine switch is turned to the
“ACC” or “ON” position, the initial screen
will be displayed and the system will begin operating.
Vehicles with a smart key system
When the engine <power> switch is
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON <ON> mode, the initial screen will be
displayed and the system will begin operating.
 Images shown on the initial screen can
be changed to suit individual preferences. (→P.62.)
 After a few seconds, the “Caution” screen
will be displayed.
 After about 5 seconds, the “Caution”
screen automatically switches to the next
screen.
WARNING
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION*
This system reminds users when to replace certain parts or components and
shows dealer information (if registered) on the screen.
When the vehicle reaches a previously
set driving distance or date specified
for a scheduled maintenance check,
the “Maintenance Reminder” screen
will be displayed when the system is
turned on.
 To prevent the screen from being displayed again, select “Do Not Tell Me
Again”.
 To register maintenance information:
→P.69
 If
is selected, the registered
phone number can be called.
● When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running <the hybrid system operating>, always apply the parking brake
for safety.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
32
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
RESTARTING THE SYSTEM
When system response is extremely
slow, the system can be restarted.
2
1
BASIC FUNCTION
Press and hold the “PWR·VOL” knob
for 3 seconds or more.
33
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2. CAPACITIVE TOUCH SWITCHES
The control panel uses capacitive
touch sensors.
 Capacitive touch switch sensor sensitivity can be adjusted. (→P.59)
■HANDLING OF THE CONTROL
PANEL
In the following cases, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.
 If the surface of the touch switch is dirty or
has liquid attached to it, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.
 If the surface of the touch switch receives
electromagnetic waves, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.
 If wearing gloves during operation, nonresponse may occur.
 If fingernails are used to operate the system, non-response may occur.
 If a touch pen is used to operate the system, non-response may occur.
 If the palm of your hand touches the surface of the touch switch during operation,
incorrect operation may occur.
 If the palm of your hand touches the surface of the touch switch, incorrect operation may occur.
 If operations are performed quickly, nonresponse may occur.
34
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
INFORMATION
● Please do not reach your hand to the
part of button when the system turn on.
Because the button may become unresponsive for a while.
But it will be back to normal for a given
time even if the system turned on under
the condition.
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
3. TOUCH SCREEN GESTURES
Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.
Operation method
Outline
Main use
2
Changing and selecting various settings
Drag*1
Touch the screen with
your finger, and move the
screen to the desired position.
• Scrolling the lists
• Scrolling the map screen*2
Flick*1
Quickly move the screen
by flicking with your finger.
• Scrolling the main screen page
• Scrolling the map screen*2
*1: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
*2
: Entune Premium Audio only
INFORMATION
● Flick operations may not be performed smoothly in high altitudes.
35
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
BASIC FUNCTION
Touch
Quickly touch and release
once.
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
4. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION
This system is operated mainly by the
buttons on the screen. (Referred to as
screen buttons in this manual.)
 When a screen button is touched, a
beep sounds. (To set the beep
sound:→P.59)
NOTICE
● To prevent damaging the screen, lightly
touch the screen buttons with your finger.
● Do not use objects other than your finger
to touch the screen.
● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners
to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.
INFORMATION
● If the system does not respond to touching a screen button, move your finger
away from the screen and then touch it
again.
● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
● The displayed image may become
darker and moving images may be
slightly distorted when the screen is
cold.
● In extremely cold conditions, the map
may not be displayed and the data input
by a user may be deleted. Also, the
screen buttons may be harder than
usual to depress.
● When you look at the screen through
polarized material such as polarized
sunglasses, the screen may be dark and
hard to see. If so, look at the screen
from different angles, adjust the screen
settings on the “Display Settings” screen
or take off your sunglasses.
● When
is displayed on the screen,
select
to return to the previous
screen.
36
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
5. HOME SCREEN OPERATION
The home screen can display multiple
information screens, such as the audio
system screen and hands-free screen,
simultaneously.
Press the “HOME” button.
“Home” screen is displayed.
 When a screen is selected, the selected
screen will change to a full-screen display.
The display items/area on the home
screen can be changed.
1
Select
2
3
4
5
6
Select “Home Screen”.
.
Select “Two Panel” or “Three Panel”.
Select the desired area.
Select the desired item.
Select “OK”.
INFORMATION
● When the selected item is already being
displayed and another area is selected
for that item, the item that it is replacing
will be displayed in the original item’s
location.
37
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
BASIC FUNCTION
1
2
CUSTOMIZING THE HOME
SCREEN
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
6. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION
When searching by an address, name,
etc., or entering data, letters and numbers can be entered via the screen.
LIST SCREEN
The list screen may be displayed after
entering characters.
ENTERING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS
DISPLAYING THE LIST
1
No.
Function
Select to enter desired characters.
Text field. Entered character(s) will
be displayed.
During entering character(s), when
there is only one available option for
the next character(s), the next character(s) will be displayed in gray text
in the text field automatically. Gray
text is entered by selecting this button.
Enter characters and select “OK”.
 Matching items from the database are
listed even if the entered address or name
is incomplete.
 The list will be displayed automatically if
the maximum number of characters is
entered or matching items can be displayed on a single list screen.
Select to erase one character.
Select to display the alphabet keys.
INFORMATION
Select to display other symbols.
 On certain letter entry screens, letters can
be entered in upper or lower case.
: Select to enter in lower case.
: Select to enter in upper case.
 Keyboard layout can be changed.
(→P.59)
38
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
● The number of matching items is shown
on the right side of the screen. If the
number of matching items is more than
999, the system displays “∗∗∗” on the
screen.
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
■SELECTING ALL ITEMS
Some lists contain “Select All”. If “Select All” is selected, it is possible to
select all items.
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through
the list.
Select “Select All”.
“Unselect All”: Unselect all items in the
list.
Icon
Function
Select to skip to the next or previous page.
Select and hold
or
to
scroll through the displayed list.
This indicates the
screen’s position.
If
displayed
appears to the right of an
item name, the complete name is
too long to display.
Select
to scroll to the end of
the name.
Select
to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
39
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
BASIC FUNCTION
1
LIST SCREEN OPERATION
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
SORTING
The order of a list displayed on the
screen can be sorted in the order of
distance from the current location,
date, category, etc.
1
Select “Sort”.
CHARACTER JUMP BUTTONS
IN LISTS
Some lists contain character screen
buttons, “ABC”, “DEF” etc., which allow a direct jump to list entries that begin with the same letter as the
character screen button.
1
2
Select the desired character jump buttons.
Select the desired sorting criteria.
INFORMATION
● Every time the same character screen
button is selected, the list starting with
the subsequent character is displayed.
40
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
7. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT
The contrast and brightness of the
screen display and the image of the
camera display can be adjusted. The
screen can also be changed to either
day or night mode.
Press the “APPS” button.
● When the screen is viewed through
polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern
may appear on the screen due to optical
characteristics of the screen. If this is
disturbing, please operate the screen
without polarized sunglasses.
CHANGING BETWEEN DAY
AND NIGHT MODE
Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the screen changes to day
or night mode. This feature is available
when the headlight is switched on.
2
3
4
1
Select “Day Mode”.
Select “Setup”.
INFORMATION
Select “Display”.
● If the screen is set to day mode with the
headlight switch turned on, this condition
is memorized even with the engine
<hybrid system> turned off.
Select the items to be set.
No.
Function
Page
Select to adjust the screen
display.
42
Select to adjust the camera
display.
Select to turn day mode on/
off.
41
41
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
BASIC FUNCTION
1
INFORMATION
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
ADJUSTING THE CONTRAST/
BRIGHTNESS
The contrast and brightness of the
screen can be adjusted according to
the brightness of your surroundings.
1
2
Select “General” or “Camera”.
Select the desired item.
General
Camera
Screen button
Function
“Brightness” “+”
Select to brighten the
screen.
“Brightness” “-”
Select to darken the
screen.
“Contrast” “+”
Select to strengthen the
contrast of the screen.
“Contrast” “-”
Select to weaken the
contrast of the screen.
3
Select “OK”.
42
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
8. LINKING MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY AND THE SYSTEM
The following functions of the system are linked with the multi-information display
in the instrument cluster:
43
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
BASIC FUNCTION
• Phone
• Fuel consumption
etc.
These functions can be operated using multi-information display control switches
on the steering wheel. For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME
5
To use the hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a Bluetooth®
phone with the system.
When this screen is displayed, search
for the device name displayed on this
screen on the screen of your
Bluetooth® device.
Once the phone has been registered, it
is possible to use the hands-free system.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
For details about registering
Bluetooth® device: →P.52
1
a
Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting
of your cellular phone on.
 This function is not available when
Bluetooth® connection setting of your cellular phone is set to off.
2
Press the “APPS” button.
3
Select “Phone”.
 Operations up to this point can also be
performed by pressing the
the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
4
switch on
switch on the
Select “Yes” to register a phone.
44
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
 For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
 To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.
6
Register the Bluetooth® device using
your Bluetooth® device.
 A PIN-code is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth® device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth®
device’s screen. Respond and operate the
Bluetooth® device according to the confirmation message.
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
7
Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
 The system waits for connection requests
coming from the registered device.
 At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions are
not yet available.
Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting
of your audio player on.
 This function is not available when the
Bluetooth® connection setting of your
audio player is set to off.
2
Press the “AUDIO” button.
3
Select “Source” on the audio screen
or press “AUDIO” button again.
4
5
Select “
6
Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
Select “OK” when the connection status changes from “Connection waiting...” to “Connected”.
 If an error message is displayed, follow
the guidance on the screen to try again.
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE
FIRST TIME
To use the Bluetooth® Audio, it is necessary to register an audio player with
the system.
Audio”.
Select “Yes” to register an audio player.
Bluetooth® DEVICE” from “STEP 2”.
(→P.52)
Once the player has been registered, it
is possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
For details about registering
Bluetooth® device: →P.52
a
45
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
BASIC FUNCTION
8
1
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
PROFILES
This system supports the following services.
Bluetooth®
Device
Bluetooth®
Phone/
Bluetooth®
Audio
Player
Spec.
Bluetooth® Specification
Bluetooth®
Device
Profile
HFP (Hands-Free Profile)
Function
Registering
a
Bluetooth®
vice
de-
Function
Hands-free
system
OPP (Object Push Profile)
Bluetooth®
Phone
Bluetooth®
Audio
Player
PBAP (Phone Book Access profile)
Transferring the
contacts
Requirements
Recommendations
Ver. 2.0
Ver. 3.0
+EDR
Requirements
Recommendations
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.6
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
MAP (Message Access
Profile)
Bluetooth®
phone message
⎯
Ver. 1.0
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
Connected navigation*1/Entune
App Suite*2
⎯
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.4
A2DP (Advanced Audio
Distribution Profile)
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile)
Bluetooth® audio
system
*1: Entune Audio Plus
*2: Entune Premium Audio
INFORMATION
● If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone or using
OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible.
● If the connected Bluetooth® device version is older than recommended or incompatible,
the Bluetooth® device function may not work properly.
● Refer to http://www.toyota.com/entune/ to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this system.
46
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
2
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
BASIC FUNCTION
47
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
CERTIFICATION
U.S.A. (Entune Audio Plus)
 FCC ID: AJDK066
 This device complies with Part 15 of
FCC Rules and Industry Canada
licence-exempt
RSS
standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of this device.
CAUTION:
 FCC WARNING:
Information to User-Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate
authorization may invalidate the user’s
right to operate the equipment.
 RF Exposure Compliance:
This equipment complies with FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm
or more away from person’s body.
 Co-location: This transmitter must not
be co-located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
48
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Canada (Entune Audio Plus)
 IC: 775E-K066
 This device complies with Part 15 of
FCC Rules and Industry Canada’s
iIcence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause interference;
and (2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of this
device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la
partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d'lndustrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si
le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
U.S.A. (Entune Premium Audio)
 FCC ID: ACJ932YEAP01A727
 NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any
interference
received,
including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
 FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment would void the
user’s authority to operate this device.
 CAUTION:
Radio frequency radiation exposure
information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated
with minimum distance of 20cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
49
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
BASIC FUNCTION
 This equipment complies with FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm
or more away from person's body.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements
énoncées pour un environnement non
contrôlé et respecte les règles les
radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes
directrices d'exposition et d'exposition
aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
CNR-102 de I'IC. Cet équipement doit
être installé et utilisé en gardant une
distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le radiateur et le corps humain.
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
Canada (Entune Premium Audio)
 This device complies with Industry
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2)this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1)l'appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
 This radio transmitter (identify the
device by certification number, or model
number if Category II) has been
approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below
with the maximum permissible gain and
required antenna impedance for each
antenna type indicated. Antenna types
not included in this list, having a gain
greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited
for use with this device.
Le présent émetteur radio (identifier le
dispositif par son numéro de certification ou son numéro de modèle s'il fait
partie du matériel de catégorie II) a été
approuvé par Industrie Canada pour
fonctionner avec les types d'antenne
énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain
admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les
types d'antenne non inclus dans cette
liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au
gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement
interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur.
50
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Mexico
 La operación de este equipo está sujeta
a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y
(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe
aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo Ia que pueda causar su operación
no deseada.
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS
1
Press the “APPS” button.
“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN
2
Select “Setup”.
3
4
Select “Bluetooth*”.
Function
Registering a Bluetooth device
52
Bluetooth®
53
Deleting a
Select the desired item to be set.
Page
®
device
Connecting a Bluetooth® device
54
Editing the Bluetooth® device information
56
Bluetooth® system settings
57
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
51
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
BASIC FUNCTION
2
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
DISPLAYING THE “Bluetooth*
Setup” SCREEN IN A
DIFFERENT WAY
From the
screen
1
2
3
4
phone/message
settings
Press the “APPS” button.
Select “Setup”.
Select “Phone”.
Select “Connect Phone”.
From the status display
1
Select status display area on the
screen.
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be registered.
Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP)
and audio players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(→P.51)
2
Select “Add”.
When another Bluetooth® device is connected
 To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
select “Yes”.
When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered
 A registered device needs to be replaced.
Select “Yes”, and select the device to be
replaced.
3
When this screen is displayed, search
for the device name displayed on this
screen on the screen of your
Bluetooth® device.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
52
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
 For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
 To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.
4
Register the Bluetooth® device using
 A PIN-code is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth® device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth®
device’s screen. Respond and operate the
Bluetooth® device according to the confirmation message.
5
Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
 The system waits for connection requests
coming from the registered device.
 At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions are
not yet available.
6
Select “OK” when the connection status changes from “Connection waiting...” to “Connected”.
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(→P.51)
2
3
Select “Remove”.
4
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
5
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
Select the desired device.
INFORMATION
● When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, the
contact data will be deleted at the same
time.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
 If an error message is displayed, follow
the guidance on the screen to try again.
53
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
BASIC FUNCTION
your Bluetooth® device.
DELETING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices (Phones
(HFP) and audio players (AVP)) can be
registered.
®
If more than 1 Bluetooth device has
been registered, select which device to
connect to.
1
2
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(→P.51)
Select the device to be connected.
 Supported profile icons will be displayed.
: Phone
: Audio player
: Phone/Entune App Suite service (Entune Premium Audio only)
 The profile icon for a currently connected
device will be displayed in color.
 Selecting a profile icon which is not currently connected will switch the connection to the function.
 If the desired Bluetooth® device is not
on the list, select “Add” to register the
device. (→P.52)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
54
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
Select the desired connection.
When another Bluetooth® device is connected
 To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
select “Yes”.
4
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the connection is complete.
 If an error message is displayed, follow
the guidance on the screen to try again.
INFORMATION
● It may take time if the device connection
is carried out during Bluetooth® audio
playback.
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
device being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on
the device.
● When disconnecting a Bluetooth®
device, it is recommended to disconnect
using this system.
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
■AUTO CONNECTION MODE
Vehicles without a smart key system
 When the engine switch is turned to the
“ACC” or “ON” position, the system
searches for a nearby registered device.
 The system will connect with the registered device that was last connected, if it
is nearby.
Vehicles with a smart key system
 When the engine <power> switch is
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
<ON> mode, the system searches for a
nearby registered device.
 The system will connect with the registered device that was last connected, if it
is nearby.
PHONE
If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected
due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth® network when the engine
<power> switch is in the following, the
system automatically reconnects the
Bluetooth® phone.
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine <power> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>
mode.
■CONNECTING MANUALLY
When the auto connection has failed or
“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it is
necessary to connect Bluetooth® manually.
1
Press the “APPS” button and select
“Setup”.
2
3
Select “Bluetooth*”.
Follow the steps in “CONNECTING A
Bluetooth® DEVICE” from “STEP 2”.
(→P.54)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
55
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
BASIC FUNCTION
To turn auto connection mode on, set
“Bluetooth* Power” to on. (→P.57)
Leave the Bluetooth® device in a location where the connection can be established.
■RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth®
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
EDITING THE Bluetooth®
DEVICE INFORMATION
The Bluetooth® device’s information
can be displayed on the screen. The
displayed information can be edited.
No.
Information
The name of the Bluetooth® device.
Can be changed to a desired name.
(→P.57)
Select to set the Bluetooth® audio
player connection method. (→P.57)
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(→P.51)
Device address is unique to the device and cannot be changed.
2
3
Select the desired device to be edited.
Phone number of the Bluetooth®
phone.
Select “Device Info”.
Compatibility
profile
Bluetooth® device.
of
the
Select to reset all setup items.
INFORMATION
4
Confirm and change the Bluetooth®
device information.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
56
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
● If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been registered with the same device name, the
devices can be distinguished referring to
the device’s address.
● Depending on the type of phone, some
information may not be displayed.
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
CHANGING A DEVICE NAME
1
2
Select “Device Name”.
Enter the name and select “OK”.
● Even if the device name is changed, the
name registered in your Bluetooth®
device does not change.
The Bluetooth® settings can be confirmed and changed.
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(→P.51)
2
3
Select “System Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
SETTING AUDIO PLAYER
CONNECTION METHOD
1
Select “Connect
From”.
2
Select the desired connection method.
Audio
Player
“Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio
system to the audio player.
“Device”: Select to connect the audio
player to the audio system.
 Depending on the audio player, the “Vehicle” or “Device” connection method may
be best. As such, refer to the manual that
comes with the audio player.
 To reset the connection method, select
“Default”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
57
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
BASIC FUNCTION
INFORMATION
“System Settings” SCREEN
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
No.
Information
Bluetooth®
Select to set
connection on/off.
CHANGING “Bluetooth*
Power”
Page
58
Displays system name.
Can be changed to a desired name.
58
PIN-code used when the
Bluetooth® device was registered. Can be changed to
a desired code.
58
Device address is unique
to the device and cannot be
changed.
⎯
Select to set the phone
connection status display
on/off.
⎯
Select to set the connection status display of the
audio player on/off.
⎯
Compatibility profile of the
system device.
⎯
Select to reset all setup
items.
⎯
1
Select “Bluetooth* Power”.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is on:
Vehicles without a smart key system
The Bluetooth® device is automatically
connected when the engine switch is
turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The Bluetooth® device is automatically
connected when the engine <power>
switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is off:
The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,
and the system will not connect to it next
time.
INFORMATION
● While driving, the auto connection state
can be changed from off to on, but cannot be changed from on to off.
EDITING THE Bluetooth* NAME
1
2
Select “Bluetooth* Name”.
Enter a name and select “OK”.
EDITING THE PIN-CODE
1
2
Select “Bluetooth* PIN”.
Enter a PIN-code and select “OK”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
58
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. OTHER SETTINGS
1. GENERAL SETTINGS
Settings are available for system time,
operation sounds, etc.
1
GENERAL SETTINGS
SCREEN
Press the “APPS” button.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
2
3
4
Select “Setup”.
Select “General”.
Select the items to be set.
59
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. OTHER SETTINGS
No.
Function
Select to change the time zone and
set the daylight saving time on/off.
(→P.61)
Select to change the language.
*
Select to change the unit of measure
for distance/fuel consumption.
No.
Function
Select to change the capacitive
touch button sensor sensitivity.
Select to set a pop-up message displayed on an iPhone connected via
Bluetooth® on/off when an application on the iPhone needs to be activated.
Select to change the unit of temperature.
Select to set the animations on/off.
Select to set the sound beeps on/off.
Select to customize the startup image. (→P.62)
Select to change the screen button
color.
Select to customize the screen off
image. (→P.63)
Select to change the keyboard layout.
Select to delete personal data.
(→P.64)
Select to set automatic screen
changes from the audio control
screen to the home screen to on/off.
When set to on, the screen will automatically return to the home screen
from the audio control screen after
20 seconds.
Select to update software versions.
For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Select to update “Gracenote®” database versions. For details, contact
your Toyota dealer.
Select to display the software information. Notices related to third party
software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes instructions for
obtaining such software, where applicable.)
Select to reset all setup items.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
60
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. OTHER SETTINGS
SYSTEM TIME SETTINGS
Used for changing time zones and the
on/off settings of daylight saving time.
Display the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.59)
2
3
Select “System Time”.
1
2
Select “Time Zone”.
Select the desired time zone.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
1
■SETTING THE TIME ZONE
Select the items to be set.
No.
Function
Select to change the time zone.
(→P.61)
Select to set daylight saving time on/
off.
4
Select “OK”.
61
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. OTHER SETTINGS
CUSTOMIZING THE STARTUP
AND SCREEN OFF IMAGES
■TRANSFERRING IMAGES
1
An image can be copied from a USB
memory and used as the startup and
screen off images.
Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.
Vehicles without a smart key system
When the engine switch is turned to
the “ACC” or “ON” position, the initial
screen will be displayed. (→P.32)
Vehicles with a smart key system
When the engine <power> switch is
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON <ON> mode, the initial screen will
be displayed. (→P.32)
When “Screen Off” on the “Setup”
screen is selected, the screen is turned
off and the desired screen off image
that is set is displayed. (To turn the
screen off: →P.20)
 Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.
2
3
4
5
6
7
62
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Press the “APPS” button.
Select “Setup”.
Select “General”.
Select “Customize Startup Image” or
“Customize Screen Off Image”.
Select “Transfer”.
Select “Yes”.
3. OTHER SETTINGS
INFORMATION
1
Display the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.59)
2
3
Select “Customize Startup Image”.
4
Select “OK”.
Select the desired image.
■SETTINGS THE SCREEN OFF IMAGES
1
Display the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.59)
2
Select “Customize Screen Off Image”.
3
Select the desired image.
4
Select “OK”.
63
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2
BASIC FUNCTION
● When saving the images to a USB,
name the folder that the startup image is
saved to “StartupImage” and name the
folder that the screen off image is saved
to “DisplayOffImage”. If these folder
names are not used, the system cannot
download the images. (The folder
names are case sensitive.)
● The compatible file extensions are JPG
and JPEG.
● Image files of 5 MB or less can be transferred.
● Up to 3 images can be downloaded.
● Files with non-ASCII filenames can not
be downloaded.
■SETTING THE STARTUP IMAGES
3. OTHER SETTINGS
■DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-
DELETING PERSONAL DATA
ES
1
Display the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.59)
2
Select “Customize Startup Image” or
“Customize Screen Off Image”.
3
4
1
Display the “General Settings” screen.
(→P.59)
2
3
Select “Delete Personal Data”.
4
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Select “Delete”.
Select “Delete All”.
Select “Yes”.
 Registered or changed personal settings
will be deleted or returned to their default
conditions.
For example:
• General settings
• Navigation settings*
• Audio settings
• Phone settings
*: Entune Premium Audio only
64
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. OTHER SETTINGS
NOTICE
Vehicles without a smart key system
● Entune Premium Audio only: Make sure
the map microSD card is inserted when
deleting personal data. The personal
data cannot be deleted when the map
microSD card is removed. To delete the
data, after inserting the map microSD
card, turn the engine switch to the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
Vehicles with a smart key system
● Entune Premium Audio only: Make sure
the map microSD card is inserted when
deleting personal data. The personal
data cannot be deleted when the map
microSD card is removed. To delete the
data, after inserting the map microSD
card, turn the engine <power> switch to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>
mode.
65
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. OTHER SETTINGS
2. VOICE SETTINGS
Voice volume, etc. can be set.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
4
Select “Setup”.
VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN
Select “Voice”.
Select the items to be set.
INFORMATION
● “Voice Settings” screen can also be displayed from the voice recognition top
screen. (→P.170)
No.
Function
Select to adjust the volume of voice
guidance.
*
Select to set the voice guidance
during route guidance on/off.
Select to set the voice recognition
prompts.
Select to train voice recognition.
The voice command system adapt
the user accent.
Select to set the voice prompt interrupt on/off.
*
Select to set the web search engine.
The search engines are Entune App
Suite applications. (→P.373)
Select to start the voice recognition
tutorial.
Select to reset all setup items.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
66
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. OTHER SETTINGS
3. VEHICLE SETTINGS
Settings are available for vehicle customization and peripheral monitoring
system.
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
4
Select “Setup”.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
1
Select “Vehicle”.
Select the desired item to be set.
No.
Function
Page
Select to set vehicle
customization.
“Owner’s
Manual”
Select to set intuitive
parking assist-sensor.
256
Select to set back camera guide line.
202
67
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. OTHER SETTINGS
4. DRIVER SETTINGS
The driver settings feature will allow
the system to link some preferences
(such as audio presets, button colors,
language, etc.) to a paired Bluetooth®
phone.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
4
Select “Setup”.
Select “Driver”.
Select “Enable this Feature”.
68
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
MANUALLY SELECT LINKED
SETTINGS
1
Display the driver settings screen.
(→P.68)
2
Select “Manually Select Linked Settings”.
3
Select the desired phone.
 After a few seconds, loaded screen automatically switches to the home screen.
3. OTHER SETTINGS
5. MAINTENANCE*
When this system is turned on, the
“Maintenance Reminder” screen displays when it is time to replace a part
or certain components. (→P.32)
1
Press the “APPS” button.
No.
Function
Select to set the condition of parts or
components.
Select to add new information items
separately from provided ones.
Select to reset the item which have
expired conditions.
Select to call the registered dealer.
Select to register/edit dealer information. (→P.70)
2
3
Select “Maintenance”.
Select the desired item.
When set to on, the indicator will illuminate. The system is set to give
maintenance information with the
“Maintenance Reminder” screen.
(→P.32)
INFORMATION
● When the vehicle needs to be serviced,
the screen button color will change to
orange.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
69
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
BASIC FUNCTION
Select to cancel all conditions which
have been entered.
2
3. OTHER SETTINGS
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
SETTING
1
Select the desired part or component
screen button.
 When the vehicle needs to be serviced,
the screen button color will change to
orange.
2
Set the conditions.
No.
Function
Select to enter the next maintenance
date.
Select to enter the driving distance
until the next maintenance check.
Select to cancel the conditions which
have been entered.
Select to reset the conditions which
have expired.
3
Select “OK” after entering the conditions.
INFORMATION
● For scheduled maintenance information,
refer to “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
● Depending on driving or road conditions,
the actual date and distance that maintenance should be performed may differ
from the stored date and distance in the
system.
70
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
DEALER SETTING
Dealer information can be registered in
the system. With dealer information
registered, route guidance to the dealer is available.
1
2
Select “Set Dealer”.
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.317)
 The editing dealer screen appears after
setting the location.
3. OTHER SETTINGS
3
■EDITING DEALER OR CONTACT
Select the items to be edited.
NAME
1
2
Select “Edit” next to “Dealer” or “Contact”.
Enter the name and select “OK”.
Function
Page
Select to enter the name of
a dealer.
71
Select to enter the name of
a dealer member.
71
Select to set the location.
71
Select to enter the phone
number.
71
Select to delete the dealer
information displayed on
the screen.
⎯
Select to set the displayed
dealer as a destination.
329
1
2
Select “Edit” next to “Location”.
Scroll the map to the desired point
(→P.309) and select “OK”.
■EDITING PHONE NUMBER
1
2
Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.
Enter the phone number and select
“OK”.
71
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
BASIC FUNCTION
■EDITING THE LOCATION
No.
2
3. OTHER SETTINGS
72
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
1
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
2
1
BASIC OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE..................... 76
2. SOME BASICS .............................. 77
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
AND OFF ............................................ 78
SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE ....... 78
DISC SLOT............................................ 79
USB/AUX PORT .................................... 80
SOUND SETTINGS............................... 80
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM................ 82
2
RADIO OPERATION
3
1. AM/FM RADIO............................... 83
OVERVIEW............................................ 83
4
PRESETTING A STATION .................... 86
SELECTING A STATION FROM
THE LIST............................................. 86
5
CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM ........... 87
RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM.............................................. 88
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT
(FM RADIO) ........................................ 89
USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY ..... 89
AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY ................................... 90
6
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE .............. 92
2. XM Satellite Radio........................ 93
OVERVIEW............................................ 93
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM
Satellite Radio ..................................... 95
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID ................ 97
PRESETTING A CHANNEL .................. 97
SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM
THE LIST............................................. 97
IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
MALFUNCTIONS ................................ 98
3. INTERNET RADIO ........................ 99
LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO....... 99
73
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
9
3
MEDIA OPERATION
4
AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE
CONTROLS
1. CD................................................. 100
OVERVIEW.......................................... 100
1. STEERING SWITCHES............... 118
PLAYING AN AUDIO CD..................... 102
PLAYING AN MP3/WMA/AAC
DISC.................................................. 102
5
SETUP
2. USB MEMORY ............................. 103
1. AUDIO SETTINGS....................... 120
OVERVIEW.......................................... 103
AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN ............... 120
PLAYING A USB AUDIO ..................... 106
3. iPod .............................................. 107
OVERVIEW.......................................... 107
6
TIPS FOR OPERATING THE
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
iPod AUDIO ......................................... 110
1. OPERATING INFORMATION ..... 122
4. Bluetooth® AUDIO ...................... 111
RADIO .................................................. 122
OVERVIEW.......................................... 111
CD PLAYER AND DISC....................... 123
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE ............................................. 115
iPod ...................................................... 125
LISTENING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO ..... 115
5. AUX .............................................. 116
OVERVIEW.......................................... 116
74
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
FILE INFORMATION............................ 127
TERMS................................................. 129
ERROR MESSAGES ........................... 131
1
2
7
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM OPERATION
1. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM FEATURES ................ 132
DISPLAY ............................................. 133
DISC SLOT.......................................... 134
3. PLAYING AN AUDIO CD AND
MP3/WMA DISCS ..................... 158
CONTROL SCREEN ........................... 158
SELECTING A TRACK/FILE ............... 158
SD CARD SLOT .................................. 135
REMOTE CONTROLLER.................... 135
SELECTING A FOLDER...................... 159
OPERATING FROM THE FRONT
SEATS .............................................. 139
REPEAT PLAY .................................... 159
SD CARD THAT CAN BE USED......... 141
MP3 AND WMA FILES ........................ 159
4. PLAYING AN SD CARD ............. 161
2. PLAYING A Blu-ray Disc™ (BD)
AND DVD DISCS .......................145
MAIN MENU ........................................ 161
REMOTE CONTROLLER.................... 145
PLAYING AVCHD VIDEO.................... 163
TURNING ON THE BD/DVD
MODE ............................................... 146
FORMATTING THE SD CARD ............ 164
REMOTE CONTROLLER .................... 161
PLAYING STILL PICTURES................ 162
PLAYING/PAUSING A DISC ............... 146
DELETING THE BD HISTORY
DATA ................................................. 164
OPERATING THE DISC MENU .......... 146
SD CARD INFORMATION................... 164
OPTION SCREEN ............................... 146
5. USING THE VIDEO MODE ......... 166
REMOTE CONTROLLER .................... 166
USING THE A/V INPUT PORT ............ 166
75
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
5
6
RANDOM PLAYBACK ......................... 159
COPYRIGHTS AND
TRADEMARKS ................................. 142
BD/DVD VIDEO DISCS....................... 155
4
TURNING ON THE AUDIO CD AND
MP3/WMA MODE.............................. 158
FAST FORWARDING OR
REWINDING A TRACK/FILE ............ 158
DISCS THAT CAN BE USED .............. 140
3
REMOTE CONTROLLER .................... 158
7
8
9
1. BASIC OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
The audio control screen can be reached by the following methods:
Using the “AUDIO” button
Press the “AUDIO” button to display the audio screen.
Using the “APPS” button
Press the “APPS” button, then select “Audio” to display the audio screen.
Function
Using the radio
Page
83, 93, 99
Playing an audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc
100
Playing a USB memory
103
Playing an iPod
107
®
Playing a Bluetooth device
111
Using the AUX port
116
Using the steering wheel audio switches
118
Audio system settings
120
Rear seat entertainment system
132
INFORMATION
● The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the system.
76
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC OPERATION
2. SOME BASICS
This section describes some of the basic features of the audio/visual system.
Some information may not pertain to
your system.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Your audio/visual system works when
the engine switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Your audio/visual system works when
the engine <power> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>
mode.
NOTICE
● To prevent the 12-volt battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio/
visual system on longer than necessary
when the engine is not running <the
hybrid system is not operating>.
CAUTION:
 For vehicles sold in U.S.A.:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
 Laser products (Entune Audio Plus)
• USE
OF
CONTROL
OR
ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY
RESULT
IN
HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
• THE
USE
OF
OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
WITH
THIS
PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE
HAZARD.
 Laser products (Entune Premium Audio)
THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS 1 LASER
PRODUCT. USE OF CONTROLS OR
ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY
RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION
EXPOSURE. DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR BY YOURSELF.
REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
77
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
Vehicles with a smart key system
CERTIFICATION
1. BASIC OPERATION
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
AND OFF
“PWR·VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/visual system on and off. The system
turns on in the last mode used. Turn this
knob to adjust the volume.
“AUDIO” button: Press to display screen
buttons for the audio/visual system.
SELECTING AN AUDIO
SOURCE
1
Press the “AUDIO” button.
2
Select “Source” or press “AUDIO”
button again.
3
Select the desired source.
 A function that enables automatic return
to the home screen from the audio/
visual screen can be selected. (→P.59)
INFORMATION
● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
● When there are two pages, select
or
78
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
to change the page.
1. BASIC OPERATION
REORDERING THE AUDIO
SOURCE
1
Display the “Select Audio Source”
screen. (→P.78)
2
Select “Reorder”.
DISC SLOT
INSERTING A DISC
1
Insert a disc into the disc slot.
3
Select the desired audio source then
or
to reorder.
 After insertion, the disc is automatically
loaded.
EJECTING A DISC
1
4
Press the
disc.
button and remove the
Select “OK”.
NOTICE
● Never try to disassemble or oil any part
of the CD player. Do not insert anything
other than a disc into the slot.
INFORMATION
● The player is intended for use with 4.7
in. (12 cm) discs only.
● When inserting a disc, gently insert the
disc with the label facing up.
79
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
3
1. BASIC OPERATION
USB/AUX PORT
1
SOUND SETTINGS
Open the cover and connect a device.
AUTOMATIC SOUND
LEVELIZER (ASL)
The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed to compensate for
increased vehicle noise.
1
 Turn on the power of the device if it is not
turned on.
INFORMATION
● The AUX port only supports audio input.
● If a USB hub is plugged-in, two devices
can be connected at a time.
● Even if a USB hub is used to connect
more than two USB devices, only the
first two connected devices will be recognized.
Display the “Audio Settings” screen.
(→P.120)
Type A
2
3
Select “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.
Select “High”, “Mid”, “Low”, or
“Off”.
Type B
2
Select “Auto Sound Levelizer”.
SURROUND*
1
Display the “Audio Settings” screen.
(→P.120)
2
Select “Surround”.
*: If equipped
80
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC OPERATION
TONE AND BALANCE
TONE:
1
Select “Sound” on the audio control
screen.
2
Select the desired screen button.
How good an audio program sounds is
largely determined by the mix of the
treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with
different mixes of treble, mid and bass.
3
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear
sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that when listening to a
stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase
the volume of 1 group of sounds while
decreasing the volume of another.
No.
Function
Select “+” or “-” to adjust highpitched tones.
Select “+” or “-” to adjust midpitched tones.
Select “+” or “-” to adjust lowpitched tones.
Select to adjust the sound balance
between the front and rear speakers.
Select to adjust the sound balance
between the left and right speakers.
81
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
BALANCE:
1. BASIC OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
1
Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.
 The voice command system and its list
of commands can be operated.
(→P.168)
82
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. RADIO OPERATION
1. AM/FM RADIO
OVERVIEW
The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Select “AM” or “FM” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.78)
■CONTROL SCREEN
3
Entune Audio Plus
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
Top screen
Option screen
83
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. RADIO OPERATION
Entune Premium Audio
Top screen
Option screen
■CONTROL PANEL
84
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. RADIO OPERATION
No.
Function
Select to scroll the page of preset buttons.
Select to display the option screen.
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
3
Select to display the sound setting screen.
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
Select to display a list of receivable stations/channels.
Select to scan for receivable stations/channels.
Select to store information of the audio currently being broadcast on the radio.
Select to tune to preset stations/channels.
Select to display the additional text information.
Analog FM only: Select to display RBDS text messages.
Select to turn HD Radio mode on/off.
When the “HD Radio™” indicator is off, the station list shows only analog broadcasts.
Cache radio only: Select to play/pause.
Select to display the cache radio operation buttons. (→P.87)
Press to turn mute on/off.
Cache radio only: Select to play/pause.
• Turn to step up/down frequencies.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to seek for a station/channel.
• Press and hold for continuous seek.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
INFORMATION
● The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received.
● The radio automatically blends to an HD Radio signal in AM or FM where available.
85
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. RADIO OPERATION
PRESETTING A STATION
Radio mode has a mix preset function,
which can store up to 36 stations (6
stations per page x 6 pages) from any
of the AM, FM or SAT bands.
1
2
Tune in the desired station.
SELECTING A STATION
FROM THE LIST
A station list can be displayed.
1
2
Select “Station List”.
3
Select the desired station and select
“OK”.
FM radio only: Select the desired program genre.
Select “(add new)”.
 To change the preset station to a different
one, select and hold the preset station.
3
Select “Yes” on the confirmation
screen.
4
Select “OK” after setting the new preset station.
INFORMATION
● The number of preset radio stations displayed on the screen can be changed.
(→P.121)
86
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. RADIO OPERATION
■REFRESHING THE STATION LIST
1
Select “Refresh” on the station list
screen and the following screen will be
displayed.
CACHING A RADIO
PROGRAM*
A radio program can be cached and
played back in a time-shifted manner.
3
PLAYING BACK THE CACHE
MANUALLY
“Cancel Refresh”: Select to cancel the
refresh.
“Source”: Select to change to another audio source while refreshing.
1
Display the cache radio operation buttons. (→P.83)
2
Select the desired cache radio operation button.
INFORMATION
● The audio system sound is muted during
refresh operation.
● In some situations, it may take some
time to update the station list.
No.
Function
Hides the cache operation buttons
Skips backward 2 minutes
Fast rewinds continuously
Returns to the live radio broadcast
Fast forwards continuously
Skips forward 2 minutes
Shows the current playback location
relative to the cached broadcast recording time with a bar scale.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
87
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
The broadcast cached in the program
cache can be played back manually.
2. RADIO OPERATION
AUTOMATIC PLAYBACK OF
THE CACHE
If the radio broadcast is interrupted by
another audio output, such as an
incoming phone call, the system will
automatically cache the interrupted
portion
and
perform
time-shift
playback when the interruption ends.
To manually operate the cache
operation: (→P.87)
INFORMATION
● The system can store up to 20 minutes.
Cached data will be erased when the
radio mode or station is changed or
when the audio system is turned off.
● If noise or silence occurs during the
caching process, cache writing will continue, with the noise or silence recorded
as is. In this case, the cached broadcast
will contain the noise or silence when
played back.
RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM
This audio system is equipped with Radio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).
RBDS mode allows text messages to
be received from radio stations that utilize RBDS transmitters.
When RBDS is on, the radio can
— only select stations of a particular
program type,
— display messages from radio stations.
RBDS features are available only
when listening to an FM station that
broadcasts RBDS information and the
“FM Info” indicator is on.
88
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
SELECTING A DESIRED
GENRE
1
2
Select “Station List”.
FM radio only: Select a desired genre
of station and select a desired station.
 The genre list is in the following order:
• Classical
• Country
• EasyLis (Easy Listening)
• Inform (Information)
• Jazz
• News
• Oldies
• Other
• Pop Music
• Religion
• Rock
• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
• Sports
• Talk
• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio™”
indicator is off.)
• Alert (Emergency Alert)
2. RADIO OPERATION
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT
(FM RADIO)
A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located.
1
2
Select “Station List”.
INFORMATION
● If a traffic program station is found, the
name of the traffic program station will
be displayed for a while.
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver
which allows it to receive digital
broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts it
already receives. Digital broadcasts
have better sound quality than analog
broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio with no
static or distortion. For more
information, and a guide to available
radio stations and programming, refer
to www.hdradio.com.
HD Radio Technology manufactured
under license from iBiquity Digital
Corporation.
U.S.
and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD
Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary
trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
89
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
Select the desired traffic program station.
USING HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
2. RADIO OPERATION
AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
MULTICAST
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental programs on one FM station.
1
2
PRESERVING A MUSIC
INFORMATION
Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in the system and
transmits to an iPod.
1
Select “Tag” to bookmark the music
information.
2
Connect an iPod. (→P.80)
Select the “HD)” logo.
Select the desired channel.
 Turning the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob can
also select the desired multicast channel.
90
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
 Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not
turned on.
 Once an iPod is connected, the music tag
moves from the radio into the iPod.
 When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the
“tagged” information of the songs which
were tagged while listening to the radio
can be viewed. Then a user may decide to
purchase the song or CD/Album which
had been listened to on their radio.
2. RADIO OPERATION
INFORMATION
● The tag information can not be preserved while scanning or caching the
radio station.
● If tagging the music information fails,
“Saving the HD Radio tag was unsuccessful.” will be displayed on the screen.
If this occurs, tag the information again.
● HD Radio™ stations can be preset.
● An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be
displayed on the screen when in digital.
The “HD)” logo will first appear in a gray
color indicating the station is indeed (an
analog and) a digital station. Once the
digital signal is acquired, the logo will
change to a bright orange color.
● The song title and artist name will
appear on the screen when available by
the radio station. The radio station can
send album pictures when available.
● As a user works through the analog
radio stations, (where applicable) the
radio receiver will automatically tune
from an analog signal to a digital signal
within 5 seconds.
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
91
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. RADIO OPERATION
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Experience
Cause
Action
Mismatch of time alignment
a user may hear a short period of programming replayed or an echo, stutter
or skip.
The radio stations analog
and digital volume is not
properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode.
None, radio broadcast issue. A
user can contact the radio station.
Sound fades, blending in
and out.
Radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Reception issue, may clear-up as
the vehicle continues to be driven.
Turning the indicator of the “HD
Radio™” button off can force radio
in an analog audio.
Audio mute condition when
an HD2/HD3 multicast
channel had been playing.
The radio does not have
access to digital signals at
the moment.
This is normal behavior, wait until
the digital signal returns. If out of
the coverage area, seek a new
station.
Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/HD3 multicast channel preset.
The digital multicast content is not available until
HD Radio™ broadcast can
be decoded and make the
audio available. This takes
up to 7 seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait for
the audio to become available.
Text information does not
match the present song audio.
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.
No text information shown
for the present selected frequency.
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.
92
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. RADIO OPERATION
2. XM Satellite Radio*
OVERVIEW
The satellite radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Select “XM” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.78)
■CONTROL SCREEN
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
■CONTROL PANEL
*: If equipped
93
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. RADIO OPERATION
No.
Function
Select to scroll the page of preset buttons.
Select to display the option screen.
• Select to scan for receivable channels.
• Select “Additional Information” to display the information.
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
Select to display a list of receivable channels.
Select to tune to preset channels.
Press to turn mute on/off.
• Turn to step up/down channels.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to seek for a channel.
• Press and hold for continuous seek.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
CERTIFICATION
CAUTION:
 FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
 Radio frequency exposure.
This device is approved for Mobile Application only and, to comply with applicable FCC
radio frequency exposure regulations, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in.
(20cm) between the antenna and the body of any person at all time during use.
NOTICE:
 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART15 OF THE FCC RULES.
 OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS,
1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND
2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING
INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
94
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. RADIO OPERATION
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN
XM Satellite Radio
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast
in the vehicle, a subscription to the XM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE
It is necessary to enter into a separate
service agreement with XM Satellite
Radio in order to receive satellite
broadcast programming in the vehicle.
Additional activation and service subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle
and digital satellite tuner.
 For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to
XM Satellite Radio:
U.S.A.
Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call
1-877-447-0011.
Canada
Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-438-9677.
● XM Radio Services⎯Legal Disclaimers
and Warnings
• Fees and Taxes⎯Subscription fee,
taxes, one time activation fee, and
other fees may apply. Subscription
fee is consumer only. All fees and
programming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer
Agreement
available
at
(U.S.A.)
or
www.siriusxm.com.
(Canada)
XM
www.siriusxm.ca
service only available in the 48
contiguous United States and
Canada.
Explicit Language Notice⎯Channels
with frequent explicit language are
indicated with an “XL” preceding the
channel name. Channel blocking is
available for XM Satellite Radio
receivers by notifying XM at;
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling
1-877-447-0011
Canadian Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or calling
1-877-438-9677
● It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any
technology or software incorporated in
receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM
website, the Online Service or any of its
content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice
compression software included in this
product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice
Systems, Inc.
● Note: this applies to XM receivers only
and not XM Ready devices.
95
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate
subscription. Availability is limited to
the 48 contiguous U.S. states and
some Canadian provinces.
NOTICE
2. RADIO OPERATION
INFORMATION
● XM Radio Services⎯Descriptions
• Radio and Entertainment
XM offers more than 170 satellite radio
channels of commercial-free music
and premier sports, news, talk, and
entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to millions of listeners across the
continental United States. XM subscribers listen to XM on satellite radio
receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about XM is
available online at www.siriusxm.com
(U.S.A.) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
● XM
Radio
Services⎯Subscription
Instructions
• For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio, and some
Infotainment & data services), the following paragraph shall be included.
Required XM Radio and some Infotainment & data services monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial
period. Subscription fee is consumer
only. All fees and programming subject
to change. Subscriptions are subject to
the Customer Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). XM service only available in the 48 contiguous
United States (U.S.A.) or 10 Canadian
provinces (Canada).  2011 Sirius XM
Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All other marks,
channel names and logos are the
property of their respective owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial
period; more information is available
at:
USA Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call
1-877-447-0011
Canadian Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-438-9677
96
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
INFORMATION
● XM Satellite Radio is solely responsible
for the quality, availability and content of
the satellite radio services provided,
which are subject to the terms and conditions of the XM Satellite Radio customer service agreement.
● Customers should have their radio ID
ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “Ch 000” on the radio. For details,
see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”
below.
● All fees and programming are the
responsibility of XM Satellite Radio and
are subject to change.
SATELLITE TUNER
TECHNOLOGY NOTICE
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are
awarded Type Approval Certificates
from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of
compatibility with the services offered
by XM Satellite Radio.
INFORMATION
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services
(Music and Talk) and the accompanying
Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
2. RADIO OPERATION
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID
Each XM tuner is identified with a
unique radio ID. The radio ID is required when activating an XM service
or when reporting a problem.
1
2
3
Select “Channel List”.
Select the desired program genre.
Select the desired channel and select
“OK”.
PRESETTING A CHANNEL
1
2
Tune in the desired channel.
Select “(add new)”.
 To change the preset channel to a different one, select and hold the preset station/
channel.
3
Select “Yes” on the confirmation
screen.
4
Select “OK” after setting the new preset channel.
97
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
 If “Ch 000” is selected using the
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob, the ID code,
which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will
be displayed. If another channel is
selected, the ID code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates
between displaying the radio ID and the
specific radio code.
SELECTING A CHANNEL
FROM THE LIST
2. RADIO OPERATION
IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS
When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.
Message
Explanation
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna
cable is attached securely.
“Check Antenna”
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer for assistance.
You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being
updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio
for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose “Ch 000” and all free-to-air channels.
“Ch Unauthorized”
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about
2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”.
If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listen
to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.
“No Signal”
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
“Loading”
The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit
has received the information.
“Channel Off Air”
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with
the channel at that time. No action is required.
“Chan Unavailable”
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2
seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”.
If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
INFORMATION
● Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-447-0011 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677
(Canada).
98
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. RADIO OPERATION
3. INTERNET RADIO*
LISTENING TO INTERNET
RADIO
One of Entune App Suite features is
the ability to listen to internet radio. In
order to use this service, a compatible
phone and the system needs to be set
up. For details: →P.373
● Other applications can be activated
while listening to internet radio.
● Some parts of applications can be
adjusted using the switches on the
steering wheel.
● For additional information, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/ or call
1-800-331-4331.
Select the internet radio application.
 The internet radio application screen is
displayed.
 Perform operations according to the displayed application screen.
 For the instrument panel operation
method: →P.78
 If a compatible phone is already registered, it will be connected automatically.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
99
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
1
INFORMATION
3. MEDIA OPERATION
1. CD
OVERVIEW
The CD operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Select “CD” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.78)
Insert a disc. (→P.79)
■CONTROL SCREEN
■CONTROL PANEL
100
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
• Displays cover art
• Select to display a track/file list.
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
3
Select to play/pause.
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
Shows progress
Select to set repeat playback.
Select to set random playback.
• Audio CD: Select to display a track list.
• MP3/WMA/AAC disc: Select to display a folder list.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
Disc slot
Press to play/pause.
• Turn to select a track/file.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to select a track/file.
• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
Press to eject a disc.
INFORMATION
● If a disc contains CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA files can be
played back.
● If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to 32
characters can be displayed.
● If the disc contains no CD-TEXT, only the track number would be displayed on the
screen.
101
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. MEDIA OPERATION
PLAYING AN AUDIO CD
PLAYING AN MP3/WMA/AAC
DISC
REPEATING
The track currently being listened to
can be repeated.
1
Select the repeat button to change on/
off.
REPEATING
The file currently being listened to can
be repeated.
1
Select the repeat button to change on/
off.
RANDOM ORDER
Tracks can be automatically and randomly selected.
1
Select the random button to change
on/off.
102
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
RANDOM ORDER
Files can be automatically and randomly selected.
1
Select the random button to change
on/off.
3. MEDIA OPERATION
2. USB MEMORY
OVERVIEW
The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Select “USB (DEVICE NAME)” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.78)
Connect a USB memory. (→P.80)
3
■CONTROL SCREEN
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
■CONTROL PANEL
103
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
Select to play/pause.
Shows progress
Select to set repeat playback.
Select to set random playback.
Select to display the play mode selection screen.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
• Displays cover art
• Select to display file/track list.
Press to play/pause.
• Turn to select a file/track.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to select a file/track.
• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
104
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. MEDIA OPERATION
WARNING
● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the USB memory while driving.
NOTICE
INFORMATION
● If tag information exists, the file names will be changed to track names.
105
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
● Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the
vehicle may damage the portable player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its
terminal.
3. MEDIA OPERATION
PLAYING A USB AUDIO
REPEATING
The file/track currently being listened
to can be repeated.
1
Select the repeat button to change on/
off.
RANDOM ORDER
Files/tracks can be automatically and
randomly selected.
1
Select the random button to change
on/off.
106
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. MEDIA OPERATION
3. iPod
OVERVIEW
The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Select “iPod (DEVICE NAME)” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.78)
Connect an iPod. (→P.80)
When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only
output the sound by selecting the browse screen.
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
■CONTROL SCREEN
107
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
3. MEDIA OPERATION
■CONTROL PANEL
No.
Function
• Displays cover art
• Select to display a track list.
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
Select to play/pause.
Shows progress
Select to set repeat playback.
Select to set random playback.
Select to display the play mode selection screen.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
Press to play/pause.
• Turn to select a track.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to select a track.
• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to select an audio mode.
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
108
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. MEDIA OPERATION
WARNING
● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the iPod while driving.
NOTICE
INFORMATION
● When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its battery.
● Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard.
● Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. This
function can be changed to on/off. (→P.120) It may take time to display iPod cover art,
and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will
resume playing from the same point it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be
available.
● Files/tracks selected by operating a connected iPod may not be recognized or displayed
properly.
● If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth® and USB at the same time, system operation
may become unstable. For known phone compatibility information, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
109
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
● Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the
vehicle may damage the portable player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its
terminal.
3. MEDIA OPERATION
iPod AUDIO
REPEATING
The track currently being listened to
can be repeated.
1
Select the repeat button to change on/
off.
RANDOM ORDER
Tracks can be automatically and randomly selected.
1
Select the shuffle button to change on/
off.
110
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. MEDIA OPERATION
4. Bluetooth® AUDIO
The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy listening to music that is
played on a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing
portable audio music without cables. If your device does not support Bluetooth®,
the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
3
OVERVIEW
Select “
Audio” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.78)
Connect a Bluetooth® audio device (→P.115)
Depending on the type of portable player connected, some functions may not be
available and/or the screen may look differently than shown in this manual.
■CONTROL SCREEN
111
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
The Bluetooth® audio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
3. MEDIA OPERATION
■CONTROL PANEL
No.
Function
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Displays Bluetooth® device condition.
Select to display the sound settings screen.
Select to play/pause.
Shows progress
Select to set repeat playback.
Select to set random playback.
Select to display the track list screen.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
Select to display the portable device connection screen.
• Displays cover art
• Select to display a track list.
Press to play/pause.
• Turn to select a track.
• Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the
list screens by pressing it.
• Press to select a track.
• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to select an audio mode.
112
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
WARNING
NOTICE
● Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside
the vehicle may damage the portable player.
113
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect to the Bluetooth® audio system while driving.
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter
defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the
Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than
implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could
have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
3. MEDIA OPERATION
INFORMATION
● Depending on the Bluetooth® device that is connected to the system, the music may start
playing when selecting
selecting
while it is paused. Conversely, the music may pause when
while it is playing.
● In the following conditions, the system may not function:
• The Bluetooth® device is turned off.
• The Bluetooth® device is not connected.
• The Bluetooth® device has a low battery.
● It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth® audio is being played.
● For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it.
● If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth® network when the engine <power> switch is in the following, the system will automatically
reconnect to the portable player.
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine <power> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.
● If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does
not happen. Reconnect the portable player manually.
● Bluetooth® device information is registered when the Bluetooth® device is connected to
the Bluetooth® audio system. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove the
Bluetooth® audio information from the system. (→P.64)
114
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. MEDIA OPERATION
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
LISTENING TO Bluetooth®
AUDIO
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it
is necessary to register a Bluetooth®
device with the system.
Registering an additional device
Select
“Select
Device”
on
the
The track currently being listened to
can be repeated.
1
Bluetooth® audio control screen.
2
For more information: →P.52
RANDOM ORDER
Selecting a registered device
1
Select
“Select
Device”
on
Bluetooth® audio control screen.
2
For more information: →P.54
Select the repeat button to change on/
off.
the
Tracks can be automatically and randomly selected.
1
Select the random button to change
on/off.
115
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
1
REPEATING
3. MEDIA OPERATION
5. AUX
OVERVIEW
The AUX operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Select “AUX” on the “Select Audio Source” screen. (→P.78)
Connect a device to the AUX port (→P.80)
■CONTROL SCREEN
■CONTROL PANEL
116
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the sound setting screen.
Press to turn mute on/off.
3
Press to select an audio mode.
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
• Turn to adjust volume.
• Press to turn the audio system on/off.
• Press and hold to restart the audio system.
WARNING
● Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls while driving.
NOTICE
● Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio device while it
is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio device
or its terminal.
117
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS
1. STEERING SWITCHES
Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted using the switches on the
steering wheel.
No.
Switch
Volume control switch
“
” switch
“MODE/HOLD” switch
Volume control switch
Mode
Operation
Function
Press
Volume up/down
Press and hold
Volume up/down continuously
All
118
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS
“
” switch
Mode
Operation
Function
Press
Preset station/channel up/down
Station/channel list up/down
Press and hold
Fast preset station/channel up/down
Fast station/channel list up/down
AM, FM
Preset channel up/down
Channel list up/down
Press and hold
Fast preset channel up/down
Fast channel list up/down
Audio CD, MP3/
WMA/AAC disc,
USB, iPod,
Press
Track/file up/down
Track/file list up/down
Bluetooth® audio
Press and hold
Fast track/file up/down
Fast track/file list up/down
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
Press
3
XM*
*: If equipped
“MODE/HOLD” switch
Mode
Operation
Function
Press
Change audio modes
XM , AUX
Press and hold
Mute*2 (Press and hold again to resume the sound.)
Audio CD,
MP3/WMA/
AAC disc,
USB, iPod,
Press
Change audio modes
Bluetooth®
audio,
Press and hold
Pause (Press and hold again to resume the playmode.)
AM, FM,
*1
APPS*3
*1: If equipped
*2: For AM, FM radio, if cache radio (Entune Premium Audio only) is enabled, pressing and holding the “MODE/HOLD” switch pauses the broadcast. (Press and hold again to play back the
cashed radio program.)
*3: Entune Premium Audio only
INFORMATION
● In the APPS mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selected
APPS.
119
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
5. SETUP
1. AUDIO SETTINGS
Detailed audio settings can be programmed.
1
AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN
Press the “APPS” button.
No.
2
3
4
Function
Page
Select to change the number of preset radio stations/channels displayed
on the screen.
121
Select to set cover art settings on/off.
⎯
Select to set automatic
sound levelizer.
80
*1
Select to create a feeling
of presence.
80
*2
Select to enable cache radio.
⎯
Select to reset all setup
items.
⎯
Select “Setup”.
Select “Audio”.
Select the items to be set.
*1: If equipped
*2: Entune Premium Audio only
120
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
5. SETUP
SETTING THE NUMBER OF
RADIO PRESETS
1
Display the “Audio Settings” screen.
(→P.120)
2
3
Select “Number of Radio Presets”.
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
Select the button with the desired number to be displayed.
121
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
1. OPERATING INFORMATION
NOTICE
● To avoid damage to the audio/visual
system:
• Be careful not to spill beverages over
the audio/visual system.
• Do not put anything other than an
appropriate disc into the disc slot.
INFORMATION
● The use of a cellular phone inside or
near the vehicle may cause a noise from
the speakers of the audio/visual system
which you are listening to. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
RADIO
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
the radio — it is just the normal result
of conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception.
Power lines or phone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The
farther the vehicle is from a station, the
weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly
as the vehicle moves.
Here, some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a
problem with the radio are described.
122
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
FM
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40
km). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with
the distance from the radio transmitter.
They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, making it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other
out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of
reception.
Static and fluttering: These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being
listened to is interrupted or weakened, and
there is another strong station nearby on
the FM band, the radio may tune in the
second station until the original signal can
be picked up again.
AM
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere — especially at
night. These reflected signals can interfere
with those received directly from the radio
station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interference: When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static: AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening or electrical
motors. This results in static.
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
XM
 Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,
especially metal objects, may adversely
affect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.
 Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may
invalidate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.
 This CD player is intended for use with 4.7
in. (12 cm). discs only.
 Extremely high temperatures can keep the
CD player from working. On hot days, use
the air conditioning system to cool the
inside of the vehicle before using the
player.
 Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make the CD player skip.
 If moisture gets into the CD player, the
discs may not be able to be played.
Remove the discs from the player and
wait until it dries.
Audio CDs
3
 Use only discs marked as shown above.
The following products may not be playable on your player:
• SACD
• dts CD
• Copy-protected CD
• Video CD
WARNING
● This CD player use an invisible laser
beam which could cause hazardous
laser radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the
player correctly.
123
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
CD PLAYER AND DISC
CD PLAYER
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
Special shaped discs
Transparent/translucent discs
NOTICE
● Do not use special shaped, transparent/
translucent, low quality or labeled discs
such as those shown in the illustrations.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.
● This system is not designed for use of
Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs
because they may cause damage to the
player.
● Do not use discs with a protection ring.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.
● Do not use printable discs. The use of
such discs may damage the player, or it
may be impossible to eject the disc.
Low quality discs
Correct
Labeled discs
124
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Wrong
 Handle discs carefully, especially when
inserting them. Hold them on the edge
and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny
side.
 Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other
disc damage could cause the player to
skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To
see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the
light.)
 Remove discs from the players when not
in use. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat and direct sunlight.
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
iPod
3
CD-R/RW DISCS
 CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been
subject to the “finalizing process” (a process that allows discs to be played on a
conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
 It may not be possible to play CD-R/CDRW discs recorded on a music CD
recorder or a personal computer because
of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the
lens of the unit.
 It may not be possible to play discs
recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the
environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the appropriate
application manufacturers of the applications.)
 CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by
direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit
may be unable to play some damaged
discs.
 If you insert a CD-RW disc into the player,
playback will begin more slowly than with
a conventional CD or CD-R disc.
 Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
played using the DDCD (Double Density
CD) system.
 “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
 Apple is not responsible for the operation
of this device or its compliance with safety
and regulatory standards. Please note
that the use of this accessory with iPod or
iPhone may affect wireless performance.
 iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
 The Lightning connector works with
iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s,
iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPod touch (5th generation), and iPod nano (7th generation).
 The 30-pin connector works with iPhone
4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G,
iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 4th generation), iPod classic, and iPod nano (1st
through 6th generation).
 USB works with iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6,
iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone
4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G,
iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 5th generation), iPod classic, and iPod nano (1st
through 7th generation).
125
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lintfree cloth that has been dampened with
water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in circles).
Dry it with another soft, lint-free cloth. Do
not use a conventional record cleaner or
anti-static device.
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
COMPATIBLE MODELS
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod
classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system.
Entune Audio Plus
Made for
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
iPod touch (5th generation)*
iPod touch (4th generation)
iPod touch (3rd generation)
iPod touch (2nd generation)
iPod touch (1st generation)
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPod nano (7th generation)*
iPod nano (6th generation)*
iPod nano (5th generation)
iPod nano (4th generation)
iPod nano (3rd generation)
iPod nano (2nd generation)*
iPod nano (1st generation)*
iPhone 5s*
iPhone 5c*
iPhone 5*
iPhone 4s
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
*: iPod video not supported
This system only supports audio playback.
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
126
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Entune Premium Audio
Made for
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
iPod touch (5th generation)*
iPod touch (4th generation)
iPod touch (3rd generation)
iPod touch (2nd generation)
iPod touch (1st generation)
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPod nano (7th generation)*
iPod nano (6th generation)*
iPod nano (5th generation)
iPod nano (4th generation)
iPod nano (3rd generation)
iPhone 6 Plus*
iPhone 6*
iPhone 5s*
iPhone 5c*
iPhone 5*
iPhone 4s
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
*: iPod video not supported
This system only supports audio playback.
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
■CORRESPONDING
FILE INFORMATION
■COMPATIBLE USB DEVICES
File type
USB 2.0 HS (480
Mbps) and FS
(12 Mbps)
File formats
Correspondence class
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
32/44.1/48
FAT 16/32
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
16/22.05/24
Mass
class
WMA files:
Ver. 7, 8, 9* (9.1/9.2)
32/44.1/48
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
11.025/12/16/
22.05/24/32/
44.1/48
storage
COMPRESSED
FILES
Item
USB/iPod
Compatible
file format
Frequency (kHz)
DISC
MP3/WMA/AAC
Folders in the
device
Maximum
3000
Maximum192
Files in the
device
Maximum
9999
Maximum255
Files per
folder
Maximum
255
⎯
3
*: Only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard
■CORRESPONDING BIT RATES*1
File type
Bit rate (kbps)
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
32 - 320
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
8 - 160
WMA files: Ver. 7, 8
CBR 48 - 192
WMA files:
Ver. 9*2 (9.1/9.2)
CBR 48 - 320
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
16 - 320
*1: Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible
*2: Only compatible with Windows Media
Audio Standard
127
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
USB communication
formats
■COMPATIBLE
SAMPLING
FREQUENCY
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
■COMPATIBLE CHANNEL MODES
File type
Channel mode
MP3 files
Stereo, joint stereo, dual
channel and monaural
WMA files
2ch
AAC files
1ch, 2ch (Dual channel is not
supported)
 MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA
(Windows Media Audio) and AAC
(Advanced Audio Coding) are audio compression standards.
 This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC files
on CD-R/CD-RW discs and USB memory.
 This system can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2
and with the Romeo and Joliet file system
and UDF (2.01 or lower).
 When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file, add
an appropriate file extension (.mp3/.wma/
.m4a).
 This system plays back files with .mp3/
.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/
AAC files respectively. To prevent noise
and playback errors, use the appropriate
file extension.
 This system can play only the first session/border when using multi-session/border compatible discs.
 MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag
Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats. This system cannot display disc
title, track title and artist name in other formats.
 WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/AAC
tag that is used in the same way as an ID3
tag. WMA/AAC tags carry information
such as track title and artist name.
 The emphasis function is available only
when playing MP3 files.
 This system can play back AAC files
encoded by iTunes.
128
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
 The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In
order to achieve a reasonable level of
sound quality, discs recorded with a bit
rate of at least 128 kbps are recommended.
 m3u playlists are not compatible with the
audio player.
 MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not compatible with the audio
player.
 The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).
 When playing back files recorded as VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will
not be correctly displayed if the fast forward or reverse operations are used.
 It is not possible to check folders that do
not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.
 MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8 levels deep can be played. However, the
start of playback may be delayed when
using discs containing numerous levels of
folders. For this reason, we recommend
creating discs with no more than 2 levels
of folders.
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
TERMS
001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.wma
Folder 3
006.m4a
PACKET WRITE
 This is a general term that describes the
process of writing data on-demand to CDR, etc., in the same way that data is written to floppy or hard discs.
001.mp3
002.wma . . .
006.m4a
 The order changes depending on the personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC
encoding software you use.
 This is a method of embedding trackrelated information in an MP3 file. This
embedded information can include the
track number, track title, the artist’s name,
the album title, the music genre, the year
of production, comments, cover art and
other data. The contents can be freely
edited using software with ID3 tag editing
functions. Although the tags are restricted
to a number of characters, the information
can be viewed when the track is played
back.
WMA TAG
 WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA
tags carry information such as track title
and artist name.
ISO 9660 FORMAT
 This is the international standard for the
formatting of CD-ROM folders and files.
For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels of regulations.
 Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8
character file names, with a 3 character
file extension. File names must be composed of one-byte capital letters and numbers. The “_” symbol may also be
included.)
 Level 2: The file name can have up to 31
characters (including the separation mark
“.” and file extension). Each folder must
contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
129
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
ID3 TAG
 The play order of the compact disc with
the structure shown above is as follows:
3
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
m3u
 Playlists created using “WINAMP” software have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
MP3
 MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on conventional
discs.
WMA
 WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression
format
developed
by
Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size
smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and
9.
 This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution
of such technology outside of this product
is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary
and third parties.
AAC
 AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding
and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and
MPEG4.
130
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
ERROR MESSAGES
Mode
USB
iPod
Explanation
“No music files found.”
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are
included in the disc.
“Check Disc”
It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it
was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly.
It indicates a disc which is not playable is inserted.
“DISC Error”
There is a trouble inside the system.
Eject the disc.
“Connection error. Please
consult your Owner’s
Manual for instructions on
how to connect the USB
device.”
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or
its connection.
“There are no files available for playback. Please
add compatible files to
your USB device.”
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are
included in the USB memory.
“Connection error. Please
consult your Owner’s
Manual for instructions on
how to connect the iPod.”
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“There are no songs available for playback. Please
add compatible files to
your iPod.”
This indicates that there is no music data in the
iPod.
“No videos found.”
This indicates that no video files are included in
the iPod.
“iPod authorization unsuccessful.”
This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod.
Please check your iPod.
INFORMATION
● If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
131
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
CD
Message
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
1. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES*
The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy
video such as Blu-ray Disc™ (BD) and DVD disc.
The video played by the rear seat entertainment system is not displayed on the audio system’s screen. In addition, the DVD video played by the audio system is not
displayed on the rear seat entertainment system’s screen.
No.
Name
No.
Name
Rear seat entertainment system
A/V input port
Remote controller
Audio system
INFORMATION
● The rear seat entertainment system can be used when the engine <power> switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.
● This system can use infrared wireless headphones. (→P.136)
*: If equipped
132
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
CERTIFICATION
DISPLAY
CAUTION:
For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
1
Press the lock release button to open
the display.
3
2
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
 Part 15 of the FCC Rules
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
 Laser products
THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS Ι LASER
PRODUCT. USE OF CONTROL OR
ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY
RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION
EXPOSURE. DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR BY YOURSELF.
REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
OPENING THE DISPLAY
Pull the display down to an easily viewable angle.
CLOSING THE DISPLAY
1
Push the display up until a click is
heard.
133
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
INFORMATION
● The illumination of the screen automatically turns off when the display is closed.
However, the rear seat entertainment
system is not turned off. (The sound is
not turned off.)
DISC SLOT
LOADING A DISC
1
Insert the disc into the slot with the label side up.
WARNING
● When the rear seat entertainment system is not used
• Keep the display closed. In the event
of an accident of sudden braking, the
opened display may hit an occupant’s
body, resulting in injury.
NOTICE
● Cleaning the display
• Wipe the display with a dry soft cloth. If
the screen is wiped with a rough cloth,
the surface of the screen may be
scratched.
● Opening and closing the display
• When opening or closing the display,
hold the bottom center of the display
outer frame. Holding or pressing the
LCD panel could result in display problems or LCD deterioration.
 The “DISC” indicator light turns on while
the disc is loaded.
 The player will start to play the disc automatically.
EJECTING A DISC
1
Press the
disc.
button and remove the
INFORMATION
● If a disc cannot be ejected, do not forcibly take out the disc. Keep pressing the
button for approximately 10 seconds
and release it.
● If the ejected disc remains in the slot for
15 seconds, the player will automatically
reload the disc.
134
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
SD CARD SLOT
1
Insert the SD card with the label side
up, positioning the cut off corner to the
right.
REMOTE CONTROLLER
The rear seat entertainment system
can be operated with the remote controller. The system cannot be operated
by touching the switches on the screen
directly.
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
 To eject the SD card, push on the center
of the SD card. When it ejects slightly pull
it straight out.
No.
Function
Turning on/off the rear seat entertainment system
Selecting a control icon
Inputting the selected control icon
Turning on/off the speaker output
Changing the screen size
Turning on the “VIDEO” mode
Adjusting the volume
Turning on the “SD” mode
135
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
No.
CHANGING THE AUDIO/VIDEO
SOURCE
Function
Turning on the “DISC” mode
1
1
Adjusting the screen settings
Press the “DISC”, “SD” or “VIDEO”
button to change the audio/video
source.
TURNING ON/OFF THE REAR
SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM
SELECTING A CONTROL ICON
1
Press the “”, “”, “” or “” button
to select the control icon on the screen.
2
Press the “ENT” button to enter.
Press the
button to turn on the
rear seat entertainment system.
 Press the
button once again to turn
off the system.
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
1
Press “+” or “-” on the “VOL” button
to adjust the volume.
 When the speaker output is off, the volume cannot be adjusted.
TURNING ON/OFF THE
SPEAKER OUTPUT
1
Press the
button to turn on/off
the speaker output.
On: The sound is available from both vehicle speakers and headphones.
Off: The sound is available from the headphones only.
CHANGING THE SCREEN SIZE
1
Press the “SIZE” button to change the
screen size.
Screen
size
Function
“Normal”
Displays the screen at the original ratio
“Wide 1”
Widens the 4:3 aspect screen
horizontally to fill the screen
“Wide 2”
Widens the screen vertically
and horizontally, at the same
ratio, to fill the entire screen
INFORMATION
● The screen size can be changed for
each media mode individually.
136
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
SETTINGS
No.
Darkens the screen
You can adjust the color, contrast, tone
and brightness of the screen. The
screen setting levels can be adjusted
for day mode and night mode individually.
Brightens the screen
Strengthens red color of the screen
Strengthens green color of the
screen
Press the “SETTING” button.
Weakens the tone of the screen
The screen settings can be adjusted.
After adjustments, select “OK”.
Strengthens the tone of the screen
“DISC” and “SD” mode
BEFORE USING THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER (FOR NEW
VEHICLE OWNERS)
1
Remove the insulating sheet.
“VIDEO” mode
INFORMATION
No.
Function
● An insulating sheet is set to prevent the
batteries from being discharged.
Turning on/off the speaker output
Turning on/off the “LCD AI”. The
“LCD AI” is automatically determines the tone of the video image
and sets the contrast to an optimum
level, displaying a sharp image.
Weakens the contrast of the screen
Strengthens the contrast of the
screen
137
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
1
2
Function
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
WHEN THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER BATTERIES
ARE FULLY DEPLETED
1
Remove the cover.
2
Remove the depleted batteries and install 2 new AA batteries.
WARNING
● To prevent accidents and electric shock
• Do not disassemble or modify the
remote controller.
● When the remote controller is not used
• Stow the remote controller. Injuries
may result in the event of an accident
or sudden braking.
● Removed batteries and other parts
• Keep away from children. These parts
are small and if swallowed by a child
they can cause choking.
NOTICE
INFORMATION
● If the remote controller batteries are discharged, the following symptoms may
occur.
• The rear seat entertainment system
control will not function properly.
• The operational range is reduced.
● When replacing the AA batteries
• Batteries can be purchased at your
Toyota dealer, electric appliance shop,
or camera stores.
• Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Toyota
dealer.
• Dispose of used batteries according to
local laws.
138
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
● To prevent damage to the remote controller
• Keep the remote controller away from
direct sunlight, heat and high humidity.
• Do not drop or strike the remote controller against hard objects.
• Do not sit on or place heavy objects on
the remote controller.
● For normal operation after replacing the
batteries, observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
• Always work with dry hands. Moisture
may cause the battery to rust.
• Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote controller.
• Do not bend any of the battery terminals.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
OPERATING FROM THE
FRONT SEATS
4
The rear seat entertainment system
can be operated from this screen.
The rear seat entertainment system
can be operated from the front seats.
1
Press the “AUDIO” button.
3
Function
Turning on/off the rear seat entertainment system
2
3
Turning on/off the rear system lock
• The operation lock on the rear
seat entertainment system can be
turned on or off.
Select “Source” on the screen.
Select “Rear”.
Selecting the rear seat entertainment system’s media mode
Audio/video operation buttons
Adjusting the sound settings
139
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
No.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
DISCS THAT CAN BE USED
Discs with the marks shown below can
be used. Playback may not be possible
depending on recording format or disc
features, or due to scratches, dirt or
deterioration.
 The following discs cannot be used on this
system:
• SACD
• BDXL™ disc
• BD-RE with the cartridge
• HD DVD
• DVD-Audio
• Video CD
Special shaped discs
Video
discs
Audio
CDs
Transparent/translucent discs
Low quality discs
140
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
Labeled discs
● Do not special shaped, transparent/
translucent, low quality or labeled discs
such as those shown in the illustrations.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.
● This system is not designed for use of
Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs
because they may cause damage to the
player.
● Do not use discs with a protection ring.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.
● Do not use printable discs. The use of
such discs may damage the player, or it
may be impossible to eject the disc.
 Memory cards are restricted to the following conditions based on SD standards.
• SD memory card (from 512MB to 2GB)
• SDHC memory card (from 4GB to 32GB)
• SDXC memory card (from 48GB to
64GB)
 miniSD cards and microSD cards can be
used, but must be used with an adaptor
card.
 MultiMedia Card (MMC) cannot be used.
SD CARD FUNCTIONS
 This system can play JPEG pictures and
AVCHD video images that are stored in an
SD card. It does not support music playback.
 Local storage
• Some BD videos have a feature to memorize disc information, such as a resume
point, in a local storage. The rear seat
entertainment system uses an SD card
as a local storage device. To use this
function, insert an SD card into the SD
card slot.
• The SD card memory function may differ
depending on the BD videos played.
• When an SD card that contains any kind
of data is inserted, BD video disc information will not be stored into the SD card
to protect the existing data in the card.
To use an SD card as a local storage,
use another SD card that does not contain any data.
141
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
NOTICE
SD CARD THAT CAN BE
USED
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
COPYRIGHTS AND
TRADEMARKS
 Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™, BD-Live™,
BDXL™, and the logos are trademarks of
the Blu-ray Disc Association.
 Java is a registered trademark of Oracle
and/or its affiliates.
 “AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are
trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and
Sony Corporation.
 “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
 SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C,
LLC.
 Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
142
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
 For DTS patents, see http://patents.
dts.com. Manufactured under license from
DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol,
& DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS 2.0 Channel is
a trademark of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
 This product is licensed under the AVC
patent portfolio license and the VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal use of
a consumer or other uses in which it does
not receive remuneration to (i) encode
video in compliance with the AVC Standard and the VC-1 Standard (“AVC/VC-1
Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1
Video that was encoded by a consumer
engaged in a personal activity and/or was
obtained from a video provider licensed to
provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is
granted or shall be implied for any other
use. Additional information may be
obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://
www.mpegla.com.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
 This product incorporates the following
software:
(1) the software developed independently
by or for Panasonic Corporation,
(2) the software owned by third party and
licensed to Panasonic Corporation,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU
General Public License, Version 2 (GPL
V2),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU
LESSER General Public License, Version
2.1 (LGPL v2.1) and/or,
(5) open sourced software other than the
software licensed under the GPL v2 and/
or LGPL v2.1
For the software categorized as (3) and
(4), please refer to the terms and conditions of GPL v2 and LGPL v2.1, as the
case may be at http://www.gnu.org/
licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html
and
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/
lgpl-2.1.html.
In addition, the software categorized as
(3) and (4) are copyrighted by several individuals. Please refer to the copyright
notice of those individuals at http://
car.panasonic.jp/oss/c8u23ZXg/
The GPL/LGPL software is distributed in
the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
At least three (3) years from delivery of
products, we will give to any third party
who contacts us at the contact information
provided below, for a charge no more than
our cost of physically performing source
code distribution, a complete machinereadable copy of the corresponding
source code covered under GPL v2/LGPL
v2.1.
143
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
 Cinavia Notice
This product uses Cinavia technology to
limit the use of unauthorized copies of
some commercially-produced film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is
detected, a message will be displayed and
playback or copying will be interrupted.
More information about Cinavia technology is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information Center at http://
www.cinavia.com. To request additional
information about Cinavia by mail, send a
postcard with your mailing address to:
Cinavia Consumer Information Center,
P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138,
USA.
 This product incorporates proprietary
technology under license from Verance
Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and pending as well
as copyright and trade secret protection
for certain aspects of such technology.
Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2014 Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
 WMA (Windows Media Audio), Microsoft,
Windows, and Windows Media are the
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
 This item incorporates copy protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights
of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering
and disassembly are prohibited.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
[Contact address]
Engineering Administration Group Manager
Panasonic
Corporation
4261
Ikonobe-cho, Tsuzuki-ku, Yokohama City
224-8520, Japan
Source code is also freely available to you
and any other member of the public via
our website bellow.
http://car.panasonic.jp/oss/c8u23ZXg/
For the software categorized as (5)
includes as follows.
1. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in
the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.
org/)
2. This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Berkeley and its contributors.
3. Free Type code.
4. The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG
software.
5. Vera Fonts. (http://www.gnome.org/
fonts/)
144
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
2. PLAYING A Blu-ray Disc™ (BD) AND DVD DISCS
REMOTE CONTROLLER
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
This system can play Blu-ray Disc™
(BD) videos with digital sound. In addition to commercial BD and DVD titles,
AVCHD and BDAV videos can be
played on this system, so digital TV recorded by home digital video recorders
and BD/DVD home videos recorded by
home digital video cameras can also
be played on this system.
Press the “DISC” button if a disc has
already been loaded in the disc slot.
WARNING
● BD/DVD video precaution
• Conversational speech on some BDs/
DVDs is recorded at a low volume to
emphasize the impact of sound effects.
If you adjust the volume assuming that
the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the BD/DVD
will play, you may be startled by louder
sound effects or startled when you
change to a different audio source.
Loud sounds may have a significant
impact on the human body or pose a
driving hazard. Keep this in mind when
you adjust the volume.
No.
Function
Selecting a control icon
Inputting the selected control icon
Volume up/down
Fast-forward/rewind
Play/pause
Stop
Displaying the menu screen
Displaying the option screen
Displaying the top menu screen
145
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
No.
Function
Selecting a chapter
Turning on the BD/DVD mode
TURNING ON THE BD/DVD
MODE
1
Insert a disc or press the “DISC” button.
 The player will start to play the disc automatically.
PLAYING/PAUSING A DISC
1
Press the
pause.
button to play/
 Press and hold the
button while
pausing, the video is played slowly.
OPERATING THE DISC MENU
1
Press the “TOP MENU” or “MENU”
button.
2
Select the menu item, and press the
“ENT” button to enter.
146
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
OPTION SCREEN
Press the “OPTION” button while
watching a BD/DVD video, the following screen appears.
Press the “OPTION” button once
again or select “Hide Buttons” to turn
off the option screen.
BD video
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
DVD video
BDAV
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
AVCHD
No.
Function
Turning off the option screen
Displaying the third page
Displaying the second page
Displaying the top menu screen
Displaying the pop-up menu
Displaying the menu screen
Rewind
Stop
Play/pause
Fast-forward
Displaying the initial setup screen
Displaying the top page
Searching for a title
Searching for a chapter
147
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
No.
DISPLAYING THE POP-UP
MENU
Function
Returning to the predetermined
scene
Changing the audio language
Changing the subtitle language
Changing the angle
Changing the playback mode
BD video
Some BD video discs have a pop-up
navigation menu that can be called up
and be operated on the screen without
interrupting playback.
1
2
Changing the audio channel
Select “Pop-up Menu”.
Select the menu item, and press the
“ENT” button to enter.
Displaying the color key buttons
Displaying the 10 key pad
Displaying the secondary video
(Picture-in-picture)
Changing the secondary audio
SEARCHING FOR A TITLE OR
CHAPTER
148
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1
Select “Title Search” or “Chapter
Search”.
2
Input the title number or chapter number, and select “OK”.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
CHANGING THE ANGLE
The angle can be changed for discs
that are multi-angle compatible when
the angle mark appears on the screen.
1
2
Select “Angle”.
The audio language can be changed
for discs with multiple audio languages.
1
2
Select “Audio”.
3
Each time “Audio” is selected, another language available on the disc is selected.
CHANGING THE SUBTITLE
LANGUAGE
The subtitle language can be changed
for discs with multiple subtitle languages.
1
2
Select “Subtitle”.
Each time “Subtitle” is selected, another language available on the disc is
selected.
CHANGING THE AUDIO
CHANNEL
BDAV
The audio channel can be changed for
discs with multiple audio channels.
1
Each time “MAIN/SUB” is selected,
the mode changes in the following order:
“Hide”: Subtitle can be hidden.
BD video
“Style”: Subtitle style can be changed.
“MAIN”: Main audio channel
“SUB”: Sub audio channel
“MAIN/SUB”: Both the main and sub audio
channels
149
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
Each time “Angle” is selected, the angle changes.
CHANGING THE AUDIO
LANGUAGE
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
CHANGING THE PLAYBACK
MODE
BDAV
The playback mode can be changed to
program mode or playlist mode. Playlist mode cannot be selected if a playlist is not stored on the disc.
1
2
Select “Playback Mode”.
Each time “Playback Mode” is selected, the mode changes in the following
order:
“Program” mode: Playback the disc in order of program number
“Playlist” mode: Playback the disc in order
of playlist number
150
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
DISPLAYING THE
SECONDARY VIDEO
BD video
Picture-in-picture is a secondary video
that plays embedded in the primary
video. The secondary video can be
played from a disc compatible with the
picture-in-picture function.
1
2
Select “PinP”.
The secondary video is displayed on
the screen. Each time “PinP” is selected, another secondary video available
on the disc is selected.
“Hide”: Secondary video can be hidden.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
CHANGING THE SECONDARY
AUDIO
DISPLAYING THE 10 KEY PAD
BD video
BD video
The secondary audio that for the secondary video can be changed.
Select “PinP Audio”.
Each time “PinP Audio” is selected,
another secondary audio stored on the
disc is selected.
1
2
3
Select “Key Pad”.
The 10 key pad is displayed on the
screen.
“OFF”: Secondary audio can be turned off
DISPLAYING THE COLOR KEY
BUTTONS
BD video
The color key button is used for various
uses according to directions of contents.
1
2
Select “Color Keys”.
The color key buttons are displayed on
the screen.
151
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
1
2
The 10 key pad is used when inputting
numbers according to directions of
contents.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
INITITAL SETUP
No.
Setting a quick playback
The initial setting can be changed.
1
2
Function
Select “Setup”.
Setting a sound dynamic range
Select the settings to be changed. After the settings are changed, select
“OK”.
Returns to previous page
■CHANGING THE INITIAL AUDIO
LANGUAGE
1
2
Select “Audio Language”.
Select the desired language.
 If you cannot find the desired language,
select “Other” and input the desired language code. (→P.157)
No.
Function
Changing the initial audio language
Changing the initial subtitle language
■CHANGING THE INITIAL SUBTITLE
LANGUAGE
1
2
Select “Subtitle Language”.
Select the desired language.
Changing the initial language of the
disc menu
Setting the angle mark
Setting the DVD parental lock
Goes to next page
Restores default settings
BD history data such as bookmarks
and resume point can be deleted.
Setting the BD parental lock
152
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
 If you cannot find the desired language,
select “Other” and input the desired language code. (→P.157)
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
■CHANGING THE INITIAL LAN-
■SETTING THE DVD PARENTAL
GUAGE OF THE DISC MENU
1
2
Select “Disc Menu Language”.
Select the desired language.
LOCK
DVD video
The level of viewer restrictions can be
set.
Select “DVD Parental Lock”.
3
Input the 4-digit personal code and
then select “OK”.
 If you cannot find the desired language,
select “Other” and input the desired language code. (→P.157)
■SETTING THE ANGLE MARK
If the BD/DVD disc has angle options,
you can turn the angle mark on/off.
1
Each time “Angle Mark” is selected,
“ON” or “OFF” can be selected.
 Select
10 times to reset the personal code in case the code was forgotten.
3
Select a restriction level (1-8) and then
select “OK”.
153
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
1
2
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
■SETTING
THE
BD
PARENTAL
LOCK
■SETTING A QUICK PLAYBACK
BD video
BD video
The age of viewer restrictions can be
set.
1
2
Select “BD Parental Lock”.
After inserting a BD disc you can skip
over to the first playback point and can
immediately playback the main story.
Each time “Quick Playback” is selected,
“ON” or “OFF” can be selected.
Input the 4-digit personal code and
then select “OK”.
■SETTING A SOUND DYNAMIC
 Select
10 times to reset the personal
code in case the code was forgotten.
3
Input a restriction age (0-255) and then
select “OK”.
RANGE
The difference between the lowest and
highest sound volumes can be adjusted.
Each time “Sound Dynamic Range” is
selected, the setting changes in the following order:
“MAX”: Maximum dynamic range
“STD”: Standard dynamic range
“MIN”: Minimum dynamic range
154
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
BD/DVD VIDEO DISCS
BD/DVD VIDEO DISCS
Symbol
Meaning
Indicates PAL/NTSC format
3
Indicates the number of
audio tracks
Indicates the number of
language subtitles
Indicates the number of
angles
Indicates the screen display ratios available
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates the disc’s region code
• BD video
“ABC”: all regions
Alphabet: region code
• DVD video
“ALL”: all regions
Number: region code
155
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
 Compatible media
Media that can be used for playback are
BD-ROMs, BD-Rs, BD-REs, DVD-ROMs,
DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs.
 Compatible disc formats
Disc formats that can be used for playback are BD video formats, BDAV formats, AVCHD formats, and DVD video
formats
 This player conforms to NTSC/PAL color
TV formats.
 Region codes
Some BD/DVD video discs have a region
code indicating the region in which you
can use the BD/DVD video disc.
If the BD video disc is not labeled “A” or
“ABC” or if the DVD video disc is not
labeled “1” or “ALL”, you cannot use it on
this player.
If you attempt to play BD/DVD video discs
with incompatible region codes on this
player, an error message appears on the
screen. Even if the BD/DVD video disc
does not have a region code, in some
cases it cannot be used.
 When storing content on BD-R, BD-RE,
DVD-R or DVD-RW discs, they must be
finalized using a recorder. Discs that are
not finalized cannot be played by this system.
 Discs that are recorded with multi session
cannot be played by this system.
 BD-Live™ is not supported.
SYMBOLS SHOWN ON BD/DVD
VIDEO DISCS
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
BD/DVD VIDEO DISC
INFORMATION
 Parental controls
This feature limits what can be viewed in
conformity with the level of restrictions of
the country. The level of restrictions varies
depending on the BD/DVD video disc.
Some BD/DVD video discs cannot be
played at all, or violent scenes are skipped
or replaced with other scenes.
• DVD video
Level 1: DVD video discs for children
can be played.
Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children
and G-rated movies can be played.
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can
be played.
• BD video
Parental controls of BD videos can be
set up by inputting an age. If the target
age of BD video exceeds the age restriction that was set up, then playback will
not be possible.
 Multi-angle feature
You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.
 Multi-language option
You can select the subtitle and audio languages.
 Region codes
The region codes are provided on BD/
DVD players and BD/DVD discs. If the
BD/DVD disc does not have the same
region code as the BD/DVD player, you
cannot play the disc on the player.
 Title and chapter
Video and audio programs stored in BD/
DVD video discs are divided into parts by
title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and
audio programs stored on BD/DVD video
discs. Usually, one movie, one album, or
one audio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A title comprises of one or more
chapters.
 AVCHD
AVCHD is a new format (standard) for
high definition video cameras that can
record and play high-resolution HD
images.
DVDs and SD cards with videos recorded
in AVCHD format can playback on this
system.
 BDAV (Blu-ray Disc™ Audio/visual)
BDAV is one of the audio/visual recording
formats for Blu-ray Disc™, has been
made primarily for the purpose of broadcasting the recording.
It is used when recording to BD-R and
BDRE by Blu-ray™ recorder.
 BD-J
Some BD video discs contain Java applications, and these applications are called
BD-J. You can enjoy various interactive
features in addition to playing normal
video.
 Pop-up menu
Some BD video discs have a pop-up navigation menu that can be called up and be
operated on the screen without interrupting playback.
 Picture-in-picture
This is a function of BD video that plays
the primary video and secondary video
simultaneously. For instance, the function
is capable of playing the original movie as
the primary video while playing video commentary from the film director on a small
screen as a secondary video.
 DUBA (Disc Unbound BD-J Application)
For BD videos that come as a 2 disc set or
more, after finishing and ejecting one of
the discs, continuation of the video can be
seen shortly after replacing the disc with
the proper disc.
 Playlist (BDAV only)
A playlist of favorite scenes by Blu-ray™
recorder can be created and the scenes
can playback via playlist.
AUDIO
This player can play liner PCM, Dolby digital, DTS and MPEG audio format. Other
decoded types cannot be played.
156
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
LANGUAGE CODES LIST
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
English
0515
Esperanto
1201
Latin
1912
Slovenian
1001
Japanese
0520
Estonian
1214
Lingala
1913
Samoan
0618
French
0521
Basque
1215
Laotian
1914
Shona
0405
German
0601
Persian
1220
Lithuanian
1915
Somali
0920
Italian
0609
Finnish
1222
Latvian, Lettish
1917
Albanian
0519
Spanish
0610
Fiji
1307
Malagasy
1918
Serbian
2608
Chinese
0615
Faroese
1309
Maori
1919
Siswati
1412
Dutch
0625
Frisian
1311
Macedonian
1920
Sesotho
1620
Portuguese
0701
Irish
1312
Malayalam
1921
Sundanese
1922
Swedish
0704
Scottish-Gaelic
1314
Mongolian
1923
Swahili
1821
Russian
0712
Galician
1315
Moldavian
2001
Tamil
1115
Korean
0714
Guarani
1318
Marathi
2005
Telugu
0512
Greek
0721
Gujarati
1319
Malay
2007
Tajik
0101
Afar
0801
Hausa
1320
Maltese
2008
Thai
0102
Abkhazian
0809
Hindi
1325
Burmese
2009
Tigrinya
0106
Afrikaans
0818
Croatian
1401
Nauru
2011
Turkmen
0113
Amharic
0821
Hungarian
1405
Nepali
2012
Tagalog
0118
Arabic
0825
Armenian
1415
Norwegian
2014
Setswana
0119
Assamese
0901
Interlingua
1503
Occitan
2015
Tongan
0125
Aymara
0905
Interlingue
1513
(Afan) Oromo
2018
Turkish
0126
Azerbaijani
0911
Inupiak
1518
Oriya
2019
Tsonga
0201
Bashkir
0914
Indonesian
1601
Punjabi
2020
Tatar
0205
Byelorussian
0919
Icelandic
1612
Polish
2023
Twi
0207
Bulgarian
0921
Inuktitut
1619
Pashto, Pushto
2107
Uighur
0208
Bihari
0923
Hebrew
1721
Quechua
2111
Ukrainian
0209
Bislama
1009
Yiddish
1813
Rhaeto-Romance
2118
Urdu
0214
Bengali, Bangla
1023
Javanese
1814
Kirundi
2126
Uzbek
0215
Tibetan
1101
Georgian
1815
Romanian
2209
Vietnamese
0218
Breton
1111
Kazakh
1823
Kinyarwanda
2215
Volapük
0301
Catalan
1112
Greenlandic
1901
Sanskrit
2315
Wolof
0315
Corsican
1113
Cambodian
1904
Sindhi
2408
Xhosa
0319
Czech
1114
Kannada
1907
Sango
2515
Yoruba
0325
Welsh
1119
Kashmiri
1908
Serbo-Croatian
2601
Zhuang
0401
Danish
1121
Kurdish
1909
Sinhalese
2621
Zulu
0426
Bhutani
1125
Kirghiz
1911
Slovak
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
0514
157
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
3. PLAYING AN AUDIO CD AND MP3/WMA DISCS
Press the “DISC” button if a disc has
already been loaded in the disc slot.
CONTROL SCREEN
The player will start to play the disc automatically.
REMOTE CONTROLLER
No.
Function
Repeat play
Random playback
TURNING ON THE AUDIO CD
AND MP3/WMA MODE
1
Insert a disc or press the “DISC” button.
 The player will start to play the disc automatically.
SELECTING A TRACK/FILE
No.
Function
1
Selecting a control icon
Inputting the selected control icon
Volume up/down
Fast-forward/rewind
Play/pause
Selecting a track/file
Selecting a folder
Turning on the audio CD and MP3/
WMA mode
158
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Press
or
until the desired track/file number appears.
FAST FORWARDING OR
REWINDING A TRACK/FILE
1
Press and hold
or
.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
SELECTING A FOLDER
MP3/WMA
1
Press “ ” or “ ” on the “FOLDER”
button until the desired folder number
appears.
REPEAT PLAY
1
Each time “RPT” is selected, the
mode changes as follow:
Audio CD
“RPT” (track repeat) → Off
MP3/WMA
“RPT” (file repeat) → “FLD.RPT” (folder repeat) → Off
RANDOM PLAYBACK
1
Each time “RAND” is selected, the
mode changes as follow:
Audio CD
“RAND” (random) → Off
MP3/WMA
“RAND” (1 folder random) → “FLD.RAND”
(1 disc random) → Off
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format. Files
can be compressed to approximately
1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This
format compresses audio data to a
size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA
file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
 MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF
LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24
(kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with
VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128,
160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps) MPEG2
LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144,
160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint
stereo, dual channel and mono
 WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible
with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8, 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128,
160, 192 (kbps)
159
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
 Press and hold “ ” on the “FOLDER”
button, the top file stored in the top folder
in the disc will be selected.
MP3 AND WMA FILES
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
 Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA
playback:
• CD-ROM/R/RW
• DVD-ROM/R/RW
Playback in some instances may not be
possible, depending on the status of the
disc. Playback may not be possible or the
audio may jump if the disc is scratched or
marked with fingerprints.
 Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1, CDROM XA Mode 2 Form 1
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2
(Romeo, Joliet), UDF (2.01 or lower)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format
other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and
folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations
are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file
names: 20 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 255
(including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 512
 File names
• The only files that can be recognized as
MP3/WMA and played are those with the
extension .mp3 or .wma.
 Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with
multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files.
 ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver.
1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0
and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files,
making it possible to record the track title
and artist name in the same way as with
ID3 tags.
160
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
 MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files
is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished,
the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we
recommend you do not write in any files
other than MP3 or WMA files or create any
unnecessary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data
and MP3 or WMA format data, only music
data can be played.
 Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are
used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized
and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
 Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound
quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of
44.1 kHz.
• Playback may not be possible in some
instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and
other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending
on the status of the encoding and the file
format, poor sound quality or noise at the
start of playback may result. In some
cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files
are recorded on a disc, it may take more
time to recognize the disc and in some
cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
4. PLAYING AN SD CARD
This system can play still pictures and
AVCHD video that are stored in an SD
card. It does not support music playback.
Press the “SD” button if an SD card
has already been inserted in the SD
card slot.
No.
Function
Selecting a chapter
Turning on the SD card mode
MAIN MENU
3
No.
No.
Function
Page
Playing still pictures
162
Playing AVCHD video
163
Formatting the SD card
164
Deleting the BD history
data
164
Function
Selecting a control icon
Inputting the selected control icon
Volume up/down
Fast-forward/rewind
Play/pause
Stop
Displaying the option screen
161
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
REMOTE CONTROLLER
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
OPTION SCREEN
PLAYING STILL PICTURES
You can display still pictures that are
stored in an SD card.
1
Select “Picture”.
2
Select the desired still picture to show.
Press the “OPTION” button while displaying a still picture, the following
screen appears. Press the “OPTION”
button once again or select “Hide Buttons” to turn off the option screen.
No.
Function
Turning off the option screen
Displaying
screen
the
slideshow
setup
Returning to “Library View” screen
 Select
or
next or previous page.
3
Zooming out the still pictures
to show the
Rotating the still pictures
Selected picture is displayed on the
screen.
Starting slideshow
■STARTING SLIDESHOW
You can display still pictures one by
one at a constant interval.
1
 Press the “” or “” button to display the
next or previous still picture.
 Press the “SD” button to return to the “SD
Menu” screen.
162
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Select “Slideshow” to start slideshow.
 When pressing the “” or “” button
during slideshow, the previous or next still
picture will be shown, and the slideshow
will continue from that picture.
 Press the “ENT” or “OPTION” button to
stop slideshow.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
■ROTATING THE STILL PICTURES
1
Select
still picture.
or
to rotate a
 The rotate information will be maintained
until the system is turned off or the SD
card is removed.
PLAYING AVCHD VIDEO
You can play AVCHD videos that are
stored in an SD card.
1
Select “Video”.
3
■ZOOM OUT THE STILL PICTURES
Select
tures.
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
1
to zoom out the still pic-
 Select
again to cancel zoom out.
 This function is only available for smallsized still pictures.
2
AVCHD video will start playing.
■SLIDESHOW SETUP
1
2
Select “Setup”.
The slideshow settings can be
changed. After the settings are
changed, select “OK”.
 Press the “SD” button to return to the “SD
Menu” screen.
 Press the “OPTION” button while watching a video, the option screen appears.
For details on operating the option screen
of AVCHD video, see “OPTION SCREEN”
on page 162.
No.
Function
Selects slideshow interval time (seconds)
5 → 10 → 15 → 30 → 60
Selects slideshow effect
“Fade” → “Slide” → “Wipe1” →
“Wipe2” → “Dissolve” → “Zoom”
→ “OFF”
Selects on/off repeat slideshow
Restores default settings
163
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
FORMATTING THE SD CARD
1
2
Select “Format SD Card”.
Select “Yes” to format the SD card.
 If the SD card is formatted, all data on the
card will be erased.
DELETING THE BD HISTORY
DATA
The BD history data such as bookmarks and resume information can be
deleted.
1
2
Select “Clear BD Data”.
Select “Yes” to delete the BD history
data.
164
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
SD CARD INFORMATION
 Compatible files
The following files can be displayed.
 Picture file format: JPEG
• Picture resolution: between 34 × 34
and 8192 × 8192 pixels
• Gray scale JPEG is not supported
 Video file format: AVCHD
 Compatible formats
This system is compatible with SD memory cards that meet SD card specifications
FAT16 formats, SDHC memory cards in
FAT32 format, and SDXC memory cards
in exFAT format.
 An SD card is not provided with the rear
seat entertainment system and needs to
be purchased separately.
 The Panasonic SD memory card format
software version 4.0 or higher is recommended.
 Data stored in an SD card may be lost.
Before playing back pictures and videos
stored in an SD card, make certain to back
up the data.
 Before an SD card that contains any kind
of data is played, slide the lock switch on
the SD card to “LOCK” in order to prevent
any data from being accidentally deleted
or overwritten.
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
WARNING
● SD cards
• Keep away from children. These are
small and if swallowed by a child they
can cause choking.
3
NOTICE
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
● Failure to follow the precautions below
may result in damage to the SD cards or
the SD card slot.
• Do not insert anything other than an
SD card into the SD card slot.
• Do not stick levels or stickers on SD
card. There is a possibility that it may
become impossible to eject the SD
card from inside the slot.
• Do not handle an SD card with wet
hands. Doing so may cause electric
shock or a malfunction.
• Do not allow hands or metal objects to
contact the interface pins of SD cards.
• Do not place SD cards on the instrument panel, on any place with direct
sunlight or in areas with a lot of moisture.
• Do not use SD cards in any place
where static electricity or electric noise
adversely affects SD cards. This may
cause data corruption or data loss.
• Always place the SD card in its storage
case when not in use.
165
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION
5. USING THE VIDEO MODE
The rear seat entertainment system
plays videos and sound when audiovideo equipment is connected to the A/
V input port.
USING THE A/V INPUT PORT
1
Open the cover and connect audio-video equipment to the A/V input port.
Press the “VIDEO” button to turn on
the video mode.
REMOTE CONTROLLER
 The A/V input port is composed of 3 input
jacks.
Yellow: Video input
White: Left channel audio input
Red: Right channel audio input
No.
2
Turn on the power of the audio-video
equipment.
3
Press the “VIDEO” button to turn on
the video mode.
Function
Turning on the video mode
Volume up/down
INFORMATION
● The volume can be adjusted using the
vehicle’s audio controls. All other operations must be made on the audio-video
equipment itself.
For details about operation of audiovideo equipment, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTICE
● When the A/V input port is not in use,
keep the A/V input port cover closed.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure.
166
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4
1
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
2
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION
3
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM...... 168
4
1
USING THE VOICE COMMAND
SYSTEM............................................ 168
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION ..................................... 169
2. CASUAL SPEECH
RECOGNIZATION..................... 174
3. COMMAND LIST ......................... 175
2
MOBILE ASSISTANT
OPERATION
5
6
7
8
1. MOBILE ASSISTANT.................. 178
9
167
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
The voice command system enables
the audio, hands-free systems, etc. to
be operated using voice commands.
MICROPHONE
Type A
Refer to the command list for samples
of voice commands. (→P.175)
USING THE VOICE
COMMAND SYSTEM
STEERING SWITCH
Type B
 Press the talk switch to start the voice
command system.
 To cancel voice recognition, press and
hold the talk switch.
168
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
 It is unnecessary to speak directly into the
microphone when giving a command.
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
INFORMATION
The voice command system is operated by speaking commands corresponding to each function. Also you
can confirm the each command by selecting a tab.
The tabs are found on the upper part of
the screen.
1
Press the talk switch.
2
Select “OK” or press the talk switch.
 For details about this screen: →P.170
3
Say the tab selection command or select the desired tab.
 Commands related with each function are
displayed on the screen of the each function tab. Some commonly used commands are displayed on the screen of the
function tab.
 Selecting “Help” or saying “Help”
prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands and operation methods.
169
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
● The voice command system can be
operated while guidance is being spoken, when “Voice Prompt Interrupt”
(→P.66) is set to on. (It is not necessary
to wait for the confirmation beep before
speaking a command.)
● Voice commands may not be recognized
if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice
commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned
towards the microphone.
● In the following conditions, the system
may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not
be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear.
Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the
system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise,
such as wind noise.
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
4
Say the command displayed on the
screen.
 Registered POIs, registered names in the
contacts list etc., can be said in the place
of the “<>” next to the commands.
(→P.175)
For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,
“Call John smith” etc.
 If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no
selections are available, perform one of
the following to return to the previous
screen:
• Say “Go back”.
• Select “Go Back”.
 To cancel voice recognition, select “Cancel”, or press and hold the talk switch.
■DISPLAYING THE “Voice Settings”
SCREENS
 Selecting “Voice Settings” can be displayed the “Voice Settings” screen.
(→P.66)
INCREASING THE VOICE
RECOGNITION
PERFORMANCE
1
2
Press the talk switch.
Select the desired item to be set.
INFORMATION
● If the system does not respond or the
confirmation screen does not disappear,
press the talk switch and try again.
● “Voice Recognition Prompts” can be set
on the “Voice Settings” screen. (→P.66)
● Some voice guidance can be canceled
by setting voice prompts to off. Use this
setting when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing the talk
switch and hearing a beep.
No.
Function
Select to train voice recognition.
The user will be asked to say 10
sample phrases. This will help the
voice command system adapt to the
user’s accent.
Select to display the voice recognition tutorial.
Select to prevent the screen from
being displayed again.
Select to continue the voice recognition.
170
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
LAUNCH Entune App Suite
APPLICATION*
1
2
Press the talk switch.
Say “Launch <application name>”.
 Entune App Suite application screen is
displayed.
1
2
3
Press the talk switch.
Say “Enter an address”.
Say “<house number, street name,
city name, State>” continuously.
 A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say “<number>” or select the number.
 Some areas cannot be recognized by the
voice recognition system.
 For information regarding the state/
province setting to perform a destination
search by address: →P.320
4
Say “Go directly”.
 After this, follow the voice guidance and
search for a destination route by voice
command operation.
● The voice command recognition is
designed to recognize the main body of
the official street name.
For example: if the official street name is
“East Main Street”, the voice command
recognition will recognize “Main”.
● Say the desired number, cardinal direction etc. in the place of the “<>”.
For example: Say “West 555”.
● Inputting the house number can be
skipped.
● Even if the state set using voice recognition is different from the set state in the
“Address” screen (which was set when a
destination was set manually), the set
state in the “Address” screen will not
change. (→P.321)
● The house number voice recognition
conditions are outlined below:
• Numerals: 10 digits or less
• Numerals and cardinal direction or a
hyphen and numerals: A total of 9
digits or less (Do not say “and”.)
• Cardinal direction or a hyphen and
numerals: A total of 9 digits or less
(Do not say “and”.)
• Numerals are recognized as single
digits only.
• The cardinal direction and hyphens
are only recognized once.
• The following cardinal directions can
be recognized: North, East, West and
South.
*:Entune Premium Audio only
171
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
PERFORMING A DESTINATION
SEARCH BY ADDRESS
(ENGLISH ONLY)*
INFORMATION
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
SEARCH FOR A SONG
1
2
Press the talk switch.
Say “Play song <name>”.
 A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say “<number>” or select the number.
 The system starts playing music and the
audio top screen is displayed.
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
CALL NAME
1
2
Press the talk switch.
Say “Call
types>”.
<contacts>
<phone
 A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say “<number>” or select the number.
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
● The Gracenote database is only compatible with the USB or iPod mode.
● A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and
playback. (→P.103, 107)
● When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so
tracks can be searched using voice
commands.
● Recognition data is updated under the
following conditions:
• When the USB memory or iPod data
has changed.
• When the voice recognition language
is changed. (→P.59)
● While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search
cannot be performed using a voice command.
172
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
● In the same manner as it is displayed on
the screen, “Call <contacts> <phone
types>”, after saying “Call a contact”
say the name, or the name and type of
phone, of a contact.
For example: “Call a contact”, “John
Smith” or “Call a contact”, “Mary
Davis”, “Mobile”
● There are 4 types of phones: Home,
Mobile, Work and Other.
● Short or abbreviated names in the contacts list may not be recognized. Change
names in the contacts list to full names.
● Sometimes a voice recognition result
confirmation screen will be displayed.
After confirming the result, say “Yes” or
“No”.
● When the system recognizes multiple
names from the contacts list, a name
candidate list will be displayed on the
screen. If the desired name is not displayed on the top of the screen, say or
select the number of the name from the
candidate list (number 1, number 2, etc.)
to select a name from the candidate list.
● When a contact has multiple phone
numbers registered in the contacts list, a
candidate list will be displayed. If the
desired phone number is not displayed
on the top of the screen, say or select
the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list (number 1,
number 2, etc.) to select a phone number from the candidate list.
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
DIAL NUMBER
1
2
Press the talk switch.
Say the phone number.
 In the same manner as it is displayed on
the screen, “Dial <number>”, after saying
“Dial a number” say the phone number.
 Say the phone number one digit at a time.
For example, if the phone number is
2345678:
Say “two three four five six seven
eight”
Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty
seven eight”
Say “Call” or press the
the steering wheel.
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
3
4
switch on
 When the system recognizes multiple
phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen.
switch on the steerPressing the
ing wheel makes a call to the top entry
on the list. If the desired phone number
is not displayed on the top of the screen,
say the number of the desired phone
number from the candidate list to select
a phone number from the candidate list.
173
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
2. CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables
recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system
cannot recognize every variation of
each command. In some situations, it
is possible to omit the command for the
procedure and directly state the desired operation. Not all voice commands are displayed in the function
menu.
INFORMATION
● If the command cannot be recognized
completely, the command input screen
will be displayed. (Search results will be
shown based on the part of the command that was recognized.)
EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR
EACH FUNCTION
Command
Expression examples
“Go Home”*1
Navigate to my house.
Take me home.
“Enter an
Address”*1
I need directions to an
address.
Give me a street.
“Find Nearby
<POI
category>”*1
Search for a <Restaurants> around here.
Find a <Restaurants>
nearby.
“Call
<name>
<type>”
Get
me
<Robert
Brown>.
Call <contacts> <phonetypes>.
“Dial <number>”
Call <911>.
“Play Artist
<name>”*2
Play the artist <name>.
I want to hear the band
<name>.
“Play Album
<name>”*2
Play album <name>.
*1: Entune Premium Audio only
*2: Only for external music device
174
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
3. COMMAND LIST
Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.
 Frequently used commands are listed in the following tables.
 For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be displayed in the screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands may not be displayed in the screen.
 The functions available may vary according to the system installed.
 Voice recognition language can be changed. (→P.59)
Basic
4
Action
“Help”
Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands
or operation methods
“Go Back”
Returns to the previous screen
“Number one/two/three/four/five”
Selects the number on the list screen
“Next Page”
Displays the next page
“Previous Page”
Displays the previous page
“Go to <tab>”
Displays the command list of the selected tab
Apps*
When the voice recognition language is set to English.
Command
“Launch <apps>”
Action
Activates the Entune App Suite application
*: Entune Premium Audio only
175
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
Command
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
Navigation*1
Command
Action
“Find Nearby <POI category>”
Displays a list of <POI category*2> near the current position
“Enter an Address”
Enables setting a destination by saying the address
“Go Home”
Displays the route to home
“Cancel Route”
Stops the route guidance
“Web search”
Set the web search engine.
1
* : Entune Premium Audio only
*2: For example; “Gas stations”, “Restaurants”, etc.
Phone
Command
Action
“Redial”
Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing
call
“Call Back”
Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call
“Show Recent Calls”
Displays the call history screen
“Dial <phone number>”
Places a call to the said phone number
“Call <contacts> <phonetypes>”
Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from the
phone book
Audio
Command
Action
“Play Playlist <name>”
Plays tracks from the selected playlist
“Play Artist <name>”
Plays tracks from the selected artist
“Play Song <name>”
Plays the selected track
“Play Album <name>”
Plays tracks from the selected album
176
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
Information*
Command
Action
“Show Forecast”
Displays weather information
“Show Traffic”
Displays traffic information
*: Available models and available country and areas (→P.182, 184)
INFORMATION
● Commands relating to operation of the audio can only be performed when the audio is
turned on.
4
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
177
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION
1. MOBILE ASSISTANT
The Mobile Assistant feature will
activate Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free mode
via the steering wheel switches. To
operate the Mobile Assistant, a
compatible cellular phone must be
registered and connected to this
system via Bluetooth®. (→P.44)
1
Press and hold the
on the steering
wheel until you hear the beeps.
2
The Mobile Assistant can be used only
when the following screen is displayed.
 To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select
“Cancel”, or press the
on the steer-
ing wheel, or press and hold the
on
the steering wheel.
 To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the
on the
steering wheel.
• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted
after the system responds to a voice
command.
178
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
• After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will
automatically end to complete the
requested action.
 The volume of the Mobile Assistant can
be adjusted using the “PWR·VOL”
knob or steering wheel volume control
switches. The Mobile Assistant and
phone call volumes are synchronized.
INFORMATION
● The available features and functions
may vary based on the iOS version
installed on the connected device.
● Some Siri features are limited in Eyes
Free mode. If you attempt to use an
unavailable function, Siri will inform you
that the function is not available.
● If Siri is not enabled on the cellular
phone connected via Bluetooth®, an
error message will be displayed on the
screen.
● While a phone call is active, the Mobile
Assistant cannot be used.
● If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio
source is Bluetooth® audio or iPod in
order to hear turn by turn direction
prompts.
2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION
MICROPHONE
It is not necessary to speak directly into
the microphone when using the Mobile
Assistant.
(Microphone
location:
→P.168)
INFORMATION
● Wait for the listening beeps before using
the Mobile Assistant.
● The Mobile Assistant may not recognize
commands in the following situations:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while the
Mobile Assistant is being used.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned
toward the microphone.
4
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
179
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION
180
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
5
1
INFORMATION
2
1
USEFUL INFORMATION
3
1. RECEIVING WEATHER
INFORMATION ......................... 182
4
DISPLAYING WEATHER
INFORMATION ................................. 182
2. RECEIVING TRAFFIC MAP
INFORMATION ......................... 184
5
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC MAP
INFORMATION ................................. 184
6
3. DATA SERVICES
SETTINGS................................. 185
7
SETTING DOWNLOAD
METHODS ........................................ 185
8
4. Driver Easy Speak...................... 186
USING Driver Easy Speak ................... 186
CHANGING Driver Easy Speak
SETTINGS ........................................ 186
181
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
9
1. USEFUL INFORMATION
1. RECEIVING WEATHER INFORMATION
Entune Audio Plus
Weather information can be received
via the HD Radio broadcast.
3
Check that the “Weather” screen is displayed.
Entune Premium Audio
Weather information can be received
via the HD Radio broadcast or by the
Entune App Suite application on a
Bluetooth® phone. For details about
the Entune App Suite application:
→P.371
No.
Select to display the weather of the
current location. (→P.183)
DISPLAYING WEATHER
INFORMATION
1
Function
Select to display the weather of a
desired location in the recently
checked locations list.
Press the “APPS” button.
Select to display the weather of a
desired location in the national cities
list.
Select to display the weather of a
desired location in the other local cities list.
*
2
Select to display weather information over the map.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
Select “Weather”.
INFORMATION
● Weather information is available in the
48 states, D.C. and Alaska of the United
States.
● The weather for current location might
not show the closest city when it first displays.
182
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. USEFUL INFORMATION
DISPLAYING THE WEATHER
OF THE CURRENT LOCATION
1
Display
the
(→P.182)
2
3
Select “Current Weather”.
“Weather”
screen.
Select the desired tab to be displayed.
INFORMATION
● If weather is set to the home screen, the
weather screen of the current location
will be displayed.
5
INFORMATION
183
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. USEFUL INFORMATION
2. RECEIVING TRAFFIC MAP INFORMATION*
Traffic map information can be received via the HD Radio.
3
Check that the “Traffic Map” screen is
displayed.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC MAP
INFORMATION
1
Press the “APPS” button.
No.
Function
Current position of your car
2
Traffic information line
The line color means the following:
Red: Heavy congestion
Yellow: Moderate traffic
Green: Freely flowing traffic
Select “Traffic”.
INFORMATION
● Traffic map information is available in
the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska of the
United States.
*: Entune Audio Plus only
184
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. USEFUL INFORMATION
3. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS*
SETTING DOWNLOAD
METHODS
Data service information, which is
comprised of traffic information and
weather information, can be received
via HD Radio broadcast and by the Entune App Suite application on a
Bluetooth® phone. The receiving method can be set to both or only via HD
Radio broadcast. For details about the
Entune App Suite application: →P.371
1
Press the “APPS” button.
4
Select the desired item to be set.
 Select a checkbox on the right to set.
No.
Function
Select to receive data only via HD
Radio broadcast.
INFORMATION
2
3
Select “Setup”.
● These settings are available in the 48
states, D.C. and Alaska of the United
States.
Select “HD Data”.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
185
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
5
INFORMATION
Select to receive data service information via both HD Radio broadcast
and the Entune App Suite application on a Bluetooth® phone. When
both methods are available, HD Radio broadcast will be selected.
1. USEFUL INFORMATION
4. Driver Easy Speak*
USING Driver Easy Speak
Driver Easy Speak will utilize the vehicle microphones and speakers to allow
passengers in the rear of the vehicle to
more easily hear the driver.
1
2
Press the “APPS” button.
Select “Driver
change on/off.
Easy
Speak”
to
CHANGING Driver Easy
Speak SETTINGS
1
2
3
4
Press the “APPS” button.
Select “Setup”.
Select “Driver Easy Speak”.
Select to adjust the audio volume.
INFORMATION
● If a side door or the back door is opened
while the Driver Easy Speak function is
in use, it will be automatically turned off.
To use this function again, close all side
doors and the back door and turn on
Driver Easy Speak again.
● Driver Easy Speak cannot be used while
the voice command system or handsfree system is in use.
● If feedback occurs, turn the Driver Easy
Speak function off or adjust its volume.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
186
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. USEFUL INFORMATION
5
INFORMATION
187
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
1
REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM..................................... 190
2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE
DISPLAY MODE ....................... 203
SCREEN DESCRIPTION..................... 203
PARKING ............................................. 204
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................... 190
3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE
DISPLAY MODE ....................... 205
SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................... 191
SCREEN DESCRIPTION..................... 205
2. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ......................... 192
PARKING ............................................. 206
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN........ 192
THE CAMERA ..................................... 192
4. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR
PRECAUTIONS......................... 207
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE
SCREEN AND THE
ACTUAL ROAD................................. 193
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN ........ 207
THE CAMERA...................................... 208
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE
SCREEN AND THE
ACTUAL ROAD ................................. 209
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS.......................................... 195
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS .......................................... 210
3. THINGS YOU SHOULD
KNOW ........................................ 197
IF YOU NOTICE ANY
SYMPTOMS...................................... 197
2
5. THINGS YOU SHOULD
KNOW ....................................... 212
IF YOU NOTICE ANY
SYMPTOMS ...................................... 212
TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR
1. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR .................................. 198
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................... 198
SCREEN DISPLAY.............................. 200
USING THE SYSTEM.......................... 201
3
PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
1. PANORAMIC
VIEW MONITOR....................... 214
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................... 214
CAMERA SWITCH............................... 217
DISPLAY .............................................. 217
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY ....... 219
188
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
1
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
2
2. CHECKING AROUND THE
VEHICLE.................................... 221
8. THINGS YOU SHOULD
KNOW ....................................... 247
SCREEN DISPLAY ............................. 221
IF YOU NOTICE ANY
SYMPTOMS ...................................... 247
3. CHECKING THE FRONT AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE........... 222
SCREEN DISPLAY ............................. 222
4. CHECKING THE SIDES OF
THE VEHICLE............................ 225
SCREEN DISPLAY ............................. 225
PRODUCT LICENSE........................... 249
4
INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
1. INTUITIVE PARKING
ASSIST...................................... 250
SCREEN DISPLAY ............................. 228
DISPLAY.............................................. 250
GUIDE LINES DISPLAYED ON
THE SCREEN ................................... 230
THE DISTANCE DISPLAY AND
BUZZER ............................................ 251
PARKING ............................................ 233
DETECTION RANGE OF THE
SENSORS ......................................... 253
6. MAGNIFYING FUNCTION ........... 235
SENSOR DETECTION
INFORMATION ................................. 253
INTUITIVE PARKING ASSISTSENSOR FAILURE WARNING......... 255
CERTIFICATION ................................. 255
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN ....... 236
THE CAMERA ..................................... 239
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE
SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL
ROAD................................................ 241
DISTORTION OF THREEDIMENSIONAL OBJECTS ON
THE SCREEN ................................... 243
2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
SETTING ................................... 256
SETTING AN ALERT VOLUME........... 256
SETTING A PARKING SONAR
DISPLAY ........................................... 257
SETTING A DISPLAY AND TONE
INDICATION...................................... 257
WHEN APPROACHING THREEDIMENSIONAL OBJECTS................ 244
MAGNIFYING FUNCTION .................. 246
189
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
TYPES OF SENSORS......................... 250
INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
SWITCH ............................................ 250
7. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
PRECAUTIONS ......................... 236
4
5
5. CHECKING THE REAR AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE........... 228
MAGNIFYING THE DISPLAY ............. 235
3
7
8
9
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM*
The rear view monitor system assists
the driver by displaying an image of the
view behind the vehicle with fixed
guide lines on the screen while backing
up, for example while parking.
INFORMATION
● The screen illustrations used in this text
are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the
driver when backing up. When backing
up, be sure to visually check all around
the vehicle both directly and using the
mirrors before proceeding. If you do
not, you may hit another vehicle, and
could possibly cause an accident.
Pay attention to the following precautions when using the rear view monitor
system.
WARNING
● Never depend on the rear view monitor
system entirely when backing up. The
image and the position of the guide lines
displayed on the screen may differ from
the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when
backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
● The instructions given are only guide
lines. When and how much to turn the
steering wheel will vary according to
traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of
this before using the rear view monitor
system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the
parking space will accommodate your
vehicle before maneuvering into it.
● Do not use the rear view monitor system
in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in
snow
• When using tire chains or emergency
tires
• When the back door is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight,
such as curves or slopes
● In low temperatures, the screen may
darken or the image may become faint.
The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become
unable to see the image on the screen.
Be sure to visually check all around the
vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position
of the fixed guide lines displayed on the
screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed
on the screen will differ from the actual
distances.(→P.193)
*: If equipped
190
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
SCREEN DESCRIPTION
Vehicles without smart key system
The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the
“R” position while the engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the
“R” position while the engine <power> switch is in IGNITION ON <ON> mode.
6
Display
Function
Vehicle width guide line
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle
width.
Vehicle center guide line
This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the
ground.
Distance guide line
Shows distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from
the edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line
Shows distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (blue) from
the edge of the bumper.
CANCELING REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
The rear view monitor system is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any
position other than the “R” position.
191
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
No.
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
2. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
AREA DISPLAYED ON
SCREEN
The rear view monitor system displays
an image of the view from the bumper
of the rear area of the vehicle.
THE CAMERA
The camera for the rear view monitor
system is located as shown in the illustration.
Displayed area
Screen
USING THE CAMERA
Corners of bumper
 The image adjustment procedure for the
rear view monitor system screen is the
same as the procedure for adjusting the
screen. (→P.41)
INFORMATION
● The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation
conditions.
● Objects which are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual distance.
● Items which are located higher than the
camera may not be displayed on the
monitor.
192
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering
to the camera, it cannot transmit a
clear image. In this case, flush it with a
large quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft and wet
cloth.
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
NOTICE
 The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking
space, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distances between the vehicle width
guide lines and the left and right dividing
lines of the parking space may not be
equal, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distance guide lines give a distance
guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the
following situations, there is a margin of
error between the fixed guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance /course on
the road.
193
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
● The rear view monitor system may not
operate properly in the following cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the
position and mounting angle of the
camera may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble
or modify it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush
the camera with a large quantity of
water and wipe it with a soft and wet
cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens
may cause the camera lens to be
scratched and unable to transmit a
clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,
window cleaner or a glass coating to
adhere to the camera. If this happens,
wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly,
such as when hot water is poured on
the vehicle in cold weather, the system
may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not
apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may
result in the camera malfunctioning.
● Do not expose the camera to strong
impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE SCREEN AND THE
ACTUAL ROAD
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP
SHARPLY
The distance guide lines will appear to
be closer to the vehicle than the actual
distance. Because of this, objects will
appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will
be a margin of error between the
guidelines and the actual distance/
course on the road.
194
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN
SHARPLY
The distance guide lines will appear to
be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects
will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on
the road.
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
WHEN ANY PART OF THE
VEHICLE SAGS
When any part of the vehicle sags due
to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin
of error between the fixed guide lines
on the screen and the actual distance/
course on the road.
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS
The distance guide lines are displayed
according to flat surfaced objects
(such as the road). It is not possible to
determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using
the vehicle width guide lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a
three-dimensional object that extends
outward (such as the flatbed of a
truck), be careful of the following.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
A margin of error
195
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
VEHICLE WIDTH GUIDE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. In the case
shown below, the truck appears to be
outside of the vehicle width guide lines
and the vehicle does not look as if it
hits the truck. However, the rear body
of the truck may actually cross over the
vehicle width guide lines. In reality if
you back up as guided by the vehicle
width guide lines, the vehicle may hit
the truck.
DISTANCE GUIDE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. On the
screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point B. However, in reality if you
back up to point A, you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that A is closest and C is farthest away. However, in
reality, the distance to A and C is the
same, and B is farther than A and C.
Positions of A, B and C
C
AB
C
B
A

Vehicle width guide lines
196
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
3. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the
solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Symptom
Solution
• The vehicle is in a dark
area
• The temperature around
the lens is either high or low
• The outside temperature is
low
• There are water droplets on
the camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is
adhering to the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the
camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent
lights,
sodium
lights, mercury lights etc.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again
once conditions have been
improved.)
The procedure for adjusting
the picture quality of the rear
view monitor system is the
same as the procedure for
adjusting the screen. (→P.41)
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as
water droplets, snow, mud
etc.) is adhering to the camera.
Flush the camera with a large
quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft
and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding
area has received a strong
impact.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The fixed guide lines are very
far out of alignment
The camera position is out of
alignment.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• The vehicle is tilted (there is
a heavy load on the vehicle,
tire pressure is low due to a
tire puncture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an
incline.
If this happens due to these
causes, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.
The image is difficult to see
197
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Likely cause
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
1. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR*
The parking assist monitor assists the
driver by displaying an image of the
view behind the vehicle while backing
up, for example while parking.
INFORMATION
● The screen illustrations used in this text
are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
The parking assist monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the
driver when backing up. When backing
up, be sure to visually check all around
the vehicle both directly and using the
mirrors before proceeding. If you do
not, you may hit another vehicle, and
could possibly cause an accident.
Pay attention to the following precautions when using the parking assist
monitor.
WARNING
● Never depend on the parking assist
monitor entirely when backing up. The
image and the position of the guide lines
displayed on the screen may differ from
the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when
backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
● If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles, people or mount the shoulder,
depress the brake pedal to stop the
vehicle.
*: If equipped
198
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
WARNING
● The instructions given are only guidelines. When and how much to turn the
steering wheel will vary according to
traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of
this before using the parking assist system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the
parking space will accommodate your
vehicle before maneuvering into it.
● Do not use the parking assist monitor in
the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in
snow
• When using tire chains or emergency
tires
• When the back door is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight,
such as curves or slopes
● In low temperatures, the screen may
darken or the image may become faint.
The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become
unable to see the image on the screen.
Be sure to visually check all around the
vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position
of the guide lines displayed on the
screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed
on the screen will differ from the actual
distances. (→P.209)
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
199
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
SCREEN DISPLAY
The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the
“R” position while the engine <power> switch is in IGNITION ON <ON> mode.

Intuitive parking assist-sensor
If an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist-sensor is on, a display is shown in the top right corner of the screen.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
If an obstacle is detected while the Rear Cross Traffic Alert is on, a display is
shown in the top right corner of the screen.
CANCELING TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
The parking assist monitor is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any position other than the “R” position.
200
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
USING THE SYSTEM
Use any of the following modes.
Estimated course line display mode
(→P.203)
The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed.
Distance guide line display mode
Distance guide lines only are displayed.
201
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Estimated course lines are displayed
which move in accordance with the operation of the steering wheel.
Parking assist guide line display mode
(→P.205)
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
SWITCHING THE DISPLAY
MODE
When the shift lever is in any position
other than the “R” position, the display
mode can be changed in the following
procedure.
1
2
3
Press the “APPS” button.
4
Select “Back Camera Guide Line
Setting”.
5
Select the display mode.
Select “Setup”.
Select “Vehicle”.
202
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
No.
Name
Detail
Estimated
course line display mode
203
Parking assist
guide line display mode
205
Distance guide
line
display
mode
Distance guide
lines only are
displayed.
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE
SCREEN DESCRIPTION
No.
Display
Function
Estimated course lines
Show an estimated course when the steering wheel is
turned.
Distance guide lines
Show distance behind the vehicle when the steering
wheel is turned.
• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated
course lines.
• The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft.
(0.5m) (red) and approximately 3ft. (1m) (yellow) from
the center of the edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line
Shows distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5m) (blue)
from the edge of the bumper.
Vehicle center guide line
The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the
ground.
WARNING
● If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated
course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
203
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Vehicle width guide line
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle
width.
• These guide lines align with the estimated course lines
when the vehicle is going straight ahead.
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
PARKING
3
When parking in a space which is in
the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the
steering directions will be reversed.
1
2
Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.
Turn the steering wheel so that the estimated course lines are within the
parking space, and back up slowly.


When the rear position of the vehicle
has entered the parking space, turn the
steering wheel so that the vehicle width
guide lines are within the left and right
dividing lines of the parking space.
Parking space
Estimated course lines
204
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Vehicle width guide line
4
Once the vehicle width guide lines and
the parking space lines are parallel,
straighten the steering wheel and back
up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate
place, and finish parking.
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE
SCREEN DESCRIPTION
No.
Display
Function
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle
width.
Parking assist guide lines
Show the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.
• Show the approximate position of the steering wheel
when parking.
Distance guide lines
Show distance behind the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5m) (red) from
the edge of the bumper.
Vehicle center guide line
The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the
ground.
205
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Vehicle width guide line
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
PARKING
When parking in a space which is in
the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the
steering directions will be reversed.
1
2

Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.
Back up until the parking assist guide
line meets the edge of the left-hand dividing line of the parking space.
Parking assist guide line
Parking space dividing line
206
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
Turn the steering wheel all the way to
the right, and back up slowly.
4
Once the vehicle is parallel with the
parking space, straighten the steering
wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate
place, and finish parking.
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
4. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS
AREA DISPLAYED ON
SCREEN
The parking assist monitor displays an
image of the view from the bumper of
the rear area of the vehicle.
Displayed area
INFORMATION
● The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation
conditions.
● Objects which are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual distance.
● Items which are located higher than the
camera may not be displayed on the
monitor.
6
Screen
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Corners of bumper
 The image adjustment procedure for the
parking assist monitor screen is the same
as the procedure for adjusting the navigation screen. (→P.41)
207
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
THE CAMERA
The camera for the parking assist monitor is located as shown in the illustration.
USING THE CAMERA
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering
to the camera, it cannot transmit a
clear image. In this case, flush it with a
large quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft and wet
cloth.
208
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NOTICE
● The parking assist monitor may not
operate properly in the following cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the
position and mounting angle of the
camera may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble
or modify it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush
the camera with a large quantity of
water and wipe it with a soft and wet
cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens
may cause the camera lens to be
scratched and unable to transmit a
clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,
window cleaner or a glass coating to
adhere to the camera. If this happens,
wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly,
such as when hot water is poured on
the vehicle in cold weather, the system
may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not
apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may
result in the camera malfunctioning.
● Do not expose the camera to strong
impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE SCREEN AND THE
ACTUAL ROAD
The distance guide lines will appear to
be closer to the vehicle than the actual
distance. Because of this, objects will
appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will
be a margin of error between the
guidelines and the actual distance/
course on the road.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
 The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking
space, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distances between the vehicle width
guide lines and the left and right dividing
lines of the parking space may not be
equal, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distance guide lines give a distance
guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the
following situations, there is a margin of
error between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance /course on
the road.
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP
SHARPLY
38_56
209
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN
SHARPLY
The distance guide lines will appear to
be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects
will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on
the road.
WHEN ANY PART OF THE
VEHICLE SAGS
When any part of the vehicle sags due
to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin
of error between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course
on the road.
A margin of error
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS
The estimated course lines target flat
surfaced objects (such as the road). It
is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such
as vehicles) using the estimated
course lines and distance guide lines.
When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as
the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the
following.
210
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
ESTIMATED COURSE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. In the case
shown below, the truck appears to be
outside of the estimated course lines
and the vehicle does not look as if it
hits the truck. However, the rear body
of the truck may actually cross over the
estimated course lines. In reality if you
back up as guided by the estimated
course lines, the vehicle may hit the
truck.
DISTANCE GUIDE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. On the
screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point B. However, in reality if you
back up to point A, you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that A is closest and C is farthest away. However, in
reality, the distance to A and C is the
same, and B is farther than A and C.
Positions of A, B and C
6
C
B
C
B
A

Estimated course lines
211
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
A
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the
solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
The image is difficult to see
• The vehicle is in a dark area
• The temperature around the
lens is either high or low
• The outside temperature is
low
• There are water droplets on
the camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is
adhering to the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights,
mercury lights etc.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.
(Use the monitor again once
conditions have been improved.)
The procedure for adjusting
the picture quality of the parking assist monitor is the same
as the procedure for adjusting
the navigation screen. (→P.41)
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as
water droplets, snow, mud
etc.) is adhering to the camera.
Flush the camera with a large
quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft
and wet cloth.
The camera or surrounding
area has received a strong impact.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The camera position is out of
alignment.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The guide lines are very far
out of alignment
• The vehicle is tilted. (There
is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due
to a tire puncture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an
incline.
If this happens due to these
causes, it does not indicate a
malfunction. Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s
surroundings.
The estimated course lines
move even though the
steering wheel is straight
There is a malfunction in the
signals being output by the
steering sensor.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The back door is open.
Close the back door.
If this does not resolve the
symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The image
alignment
Guide lines
displayed
is
out
are
212
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
of
not
2. TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
The estimated course lines
are not displayed
• The steering wheel has been
moved while the 12-volt battery was being reinstalled.
• 12-volt battery power is low.
• The steering sensor has
been reinstalled.
• There is a malfunction in the
signals being output by the
steering sensor.
Stop the vehicle, and turn the
steering wheel as far as it will
go to the left and right.
If this does not resolve the
symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
213
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
1. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR*
Panoramic view monitor assists the
driver in viewing the surroundings,
when operating at low speeds, by combining the front, side and rear cameras
and displaying a complete vehicle
overhead image on the screen.
Vehicles without a smart key system
When you press the camera switch or
shift the shift lever to the “R” position
while the engine switch is in “ON” position, the panoramic view monitor
operates.
Vehicles with a smart key system
When you press the camera switch or
shift the shift lever to the “R” position
while the engine <power> switch is in
IGNITION ON <ON> mode, the panoramic view monitor operates.
The monitor displays various views of
the position and surroundings of the
vehicle.
INFORMATION
● The screen illustrations used in this text
are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
The panoramic view monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the
driver when checking around the vehicle. When using, be sure to visually
check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. If you do not, you may hit
another vehicle or possibly cause an
accident.
Pay attention to the following precautions when using the panoramic view
monitor.
WARNING
● Never depend on the panoramic view
monitor entirely. The image and the
position of the guide lines displayed on
the screen may differ from the actual
state. Use caution just as you would
when driving any other vehicle.
● Always make sure to check all around
the vehicle with your own eyes when
driving.
● Never drive while looking only at the
screen as the image on the screen is different from actual conditions. If you are
driving while looking only at the screen,
you may hit a person or an object,
resulting in an accident. When driving,
be sure to check the vehicle’s surroundings with your own eyes and the vehicle’s mirrors.
*: If equipped
214
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
WARNING
● In panoramic view/moving view/seethrough view, the system combines
images taken from the front, back, left
and right side cameras into a single
image. There are limits to the range and
content that can be displayed. Familiarize yourself with the characteristics of
the panoramic view monitor system
before using it.
● Image clarity may decline at the four corners of the panoramic view/moving view/
see-through view. However, this is not a
malfunction, as these are the regions
along the border of each camera image
where the images are combined.
● Depending on lighting conditions near
each of the cameras, bright and dark
patches may appear on the panoramic
view/moving view/see-through view.
● The panoramic view/moving view/seethrough view display does not extend
higher than the installation position and
image capture range of each camera.
215
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
● Depending on the circumstances of the
vehicle (number of passengers, amount
of luggage, etc.), the position of the
guide lines displayed on the screen may
change. Be sure to check visually
around the vehicle before proceeding.
● Do not use the panoramic view monitor
system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in
snow
• When using tire chains or emergency
tires
• When the back door is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight,
such as curves or slopes
● In low temperatures, the screen may
darken or the image may become faint.
The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become
unable to see the image on the screen.
Be sure to visually check all around the
vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position
of the guide lines displayed on the
screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed
on the screen will differ from the actual
distances. (→P.241)
NOTICE
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
NOTICE
● There are blind spots around the vehicle. Accordingly, there are regions not
displayed in panoramic view/moving
view/see-through view.
● Three-dimensional objects displayed in
wide front view or rear view may not be
displayed in panoramic view/moving
view/see-through view.
● People and other three-dimensional
obstacles may appear differently when
displayed on the panoramic view monitor. (These differences include, among
others, cases in which displayed objects
appear to have fallen over, disappear
near image processing areas, appear
from image processing areas, or when
the actual distance to an object differs
from the displayed position.)
216
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NOTICE
● When the back door, which is equipped
with the back camera, or front doors,
which are equipped with door mirrors
that have built-in side cameras, are
open, images will not be displayed properly on the panoramic view monitor.
● The vehicle icon displayed in panoramic
view/moving view/see-through view is a
computer generated image. Accordingly,
properties such as the color, shape and
size will differ from the actual vehicle.
For this reason, nearby three-dimensional objects may appear to be touching the vehicle, and actual distances to
three-dimensional objects may differ
from those displayed.
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
CAMERA SWITCH
The camera switch is located as shown
in the illustration.
DISPLAY
CHECKING AROUND THE
VEHICLE
Moving view
See-through view
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
217
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
CHECKING THE FRONT AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE
Wide front view & panoramic view
CHECKING THE SIDES OF THE
VEHICLE
CHECKING THE REAR AND
AROUND THE VEHICLE
Rear view & panoramic view
Wide rear view
Side views
Rear view
218
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
Vehicles without a smart key system
When you press the camera switch or shift the shift lever to the “R” position while
the engine switch is in “ON” position, the panoramic view monitor operates.
Vehicles with a smart key system
When you press the camera switch or shift the shift lever to the “R” position while
the engine <power> switch is in IGNITION ON <ON> mode, the panoramic view
monitor operates.
The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle. (The following is
an example)
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
219
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
Map screen,
audio screen, etc.
Moving view
See-through view
Map screen,
audio screen, etc.
Rear view &
panoramic view
Side views
Wide front view &
panoramic view
Rear view
Pressing the camera switch
Shifting the shift lever
Selecting the display mode switching button
220
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Wide rear view
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
2. CHECKING AROUND THE VEHICLE
The moving view screen and the see-through view screen provide support when
checking the areas of around the vehicle while parking. Displays an image of the
vicinity of the vehicle combined from the 4 cameras. The screen will display a 360°
view around the vehicle from either inside the vehicle or from a birds-eye view at
an angle.
To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever is in the “P”
position.
SCREEN DISPLAY
Moving view
See-through view
6
Display
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
No.
Function
See-through view switch
Select to change to the see-through view screen.
Moving view switch
Select to change to the moving view screen.
Select to pause the rotation of the screen.
Rotation pause switch
To resume rotation, select
.
INFORMATION
● Pressing the camera switch again changes the screen back to the previously displayed
screen, such as the navigation screen.
221
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
3. CHECKING THE FRONT AND AROUND THE VEHICLE
The wide front view & panoramic view screen provides support when checking the
areas in front of the vehicle and around the vehicle when taking-off at T-intersections or other intersections during poor visibility.
To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever is in the “N” or
“D” position with the vehicle moving approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less.
SCREEN DISPLAY
Wide front view & panoramic view
No.
Display
Function
Distance guide lines
Shows distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge
of the bumper.
Estimated course lines
Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is
turned.
• This line will be displayed when the steering wheel is
turned more than 90° from the center.
Guide line switching button
Select to change the guide line mode between the distance guide line mode and the estimated course line
mode. (→P.224)
Automatic display button
Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. The indicator on the button illuminates during automatic display
mode. (→P.224)
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and
the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed
and the buzzer sounds.
222
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
INFORMATION
● Pressing the camera switch changes the screen to the side views screen or previously
displayed screen, such as the navigation screen.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
223
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
SWITCHING THE GUIDE LINE
MODE
Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode will change
as follows:
Distance guide line
AUTOMATIC DISPLAY MODE
In addition to screen switching by operating the camera switch, automatic display mode is available. In this mode,
the screen is switched automatically in
response to vehicle speed.
In automatic mode, the monitor will automatically display images in the following
situations:
 When the shift lever is shifted to “N” or “D”
position.
 When vehicle speed is reduced to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
 Only the distance guide lines are displayed.
Estimated course line
 Estimated course lines will be added to
the distance guide lines.
224
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
4. CHECKING THE SIDES OF THE VEHICLE
The side views screen provides support when checking the areas on both sides of
the vehicle, for example when taking off and stopping, when turning, etc.
To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever is in the “N” or
“D” position with the vehicle moving approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less.
SCREEN DISPLAY
Side views
6
Display
Function
Distance guide lines
Show distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the
edge of the bumper.
Vehicle width guide lines
Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mirrors.
Front tire guide lines
Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the
ground.
Automatic display button
Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. The indicator on the button illuminates during automatic display
mode. (→P.226)
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and
the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed
and the buzzer sounds.
INFORMATION
● Pressing the camera switch changes the screen to the wide front view & panoramic view
screen or previously displayed screen, such as the navigation screen.
225
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
No.
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
AUTOMATIC DISPLAY MODE
USING THE VEHICLE WIDTH
GUIDE LINE
In addition to screen switching by operating the camera switch, automatic display mode is available. In this mode,
the screen is switched automatically in
response to vehicle speed.
In automatic mode, the monitor will automatically display images in the following
situations:
• When the shift lever is shifted to “N” or
“D” position.
• When vehicle speed is reduced to
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
 Check the positions and distance between
the vehicle width guide line and a target
object such as the obstacle or curb of the
road.
226
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
 Pull over to the curb as shown in the illustration above, taking care not to let the
vehicle width guide line overlap the target
object.
 Ensure that the vehicle width line is parallel to the target object enables parking
alongside the target object.
227
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
5. CHECKING THE REAR AND AROUND THE VEHICLE
The rear view & panoramic view screen, the wide rear view screen and the rear
view screen provide support when checking the areas of behind the vehicle and
around the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.
The screens will be displayed when the shift lever is in the “R” position.
SCREEN DISPLAY
Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will change as
follows:
 Rear view & panoramic view
Displays the rear view and overhead view of the vehicle at same time.
 Wide rear view
Displays a near 180° image from the rear view camera.
228
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
 Rear view
Displays the rear view of the vehicle.
No.
Function
Display mode switching
button
Each time the display mode switching button is selected,
the mode will change as follows:
• From the rear view & panoramic view mode to the wide
rear view mode
• From the wide rear view mode to the rear view mode
• From the rear view mode to the rear view & panoramic
view mode
Guide line switching button
Select to switch the guide line mode. (→P.230)
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed and the buzzer sounds.
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and
the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed
and the buzzer sounds.
INFORMATION
● The monitor is cancelled when the shift lever is shifted into any position other than the “R”
position.
229
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Display
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
GUIDE LINES DISPLAYED ON THE SCREEN
Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode will change as follows:
 Estimated course line
Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with the operation
of the steering wheel.
 Parking assist guide line
The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed.
230
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
 Distance guide line
Only distance guide line is displayed.
No.
Display
Function
Shows distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge
of the bumper.
Vehicle center guide line
The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the
ground.
Vehicle width guide lines
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle
width.
• These guide lines align with the estimated course lines
when the vehicle is going straight ahead.
Estimated course lines
Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is
turned.
Distance guide lines
Shows the distance behind the vehicle when the steering
wheel is turned.
• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated
course lines.
• The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5
m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the
center of the edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line
Shows the distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red*)
from the edge of the bumper.
*: In estimated course line mode, the line will turn blue.
Parking assist guide lines
Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the
vehicle.
• Shows the approximate position of the steering wheel
when parking.
231
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Distance guide lines
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
WARNING
● Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers, amount of luggage, etc.), the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may change. Be sure
to check visually around the vehicle before proceeding.
● If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated
course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not use the system if the display is incorrect due to an uneven (hilly) road or a nonstraight (curvy) road.
232
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
PARKING
3
USING THE ESTIMATED
COURSE LINE
When the rear position of the vehicle
has entered the parking space, turn the
steering wheel so that the vehicle width
guide lines are within the left and right
dividing lines of the parking space.
When parking in a space which is in
the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the
steering directions will be reversed.
1
2
Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.
Turn the steering wheel so that the estimated course lines are within the
parking space, and back up slowly.
6
4
Once the vehicle width guide lines and
the parking space lines are parallel,
straighten the steering wheel and back
up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate
place, and finish parking.
Parking space
Estimated course lines
233
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Vehicle width guide line
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
USING PARKING ASSIST
GUIDE LINE
When parking in a space which is in
the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the
steering directions will be reversed.
1
2
Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.
Back up until the parking assist guide
line meets the edge of the left-hand dividing line of the parking space.
Parking assist guide line
Parking space dividing line
234
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3
Turn the steering wheel all the way to
the right, and back up slowly.
4
Once the vehicle is parallel with the
parking space, straighten the steering
wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate
place, and finish parking.
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
6. MAGNIFYING FUNCTION
If displayed objects are too small to see clearly when the wide front view & panoramic view or the rear view & panoramic view is displayed, the area around any
of the 4 corners of the vehicle can be magnified.
MAGNIFYING THE DISPLAY
1
2
Turn the intuitive parking assist on.
Touch the area on the panoramic view display you wish to magnify.
6
INFORMATION
● The magnifying function is enabled when all of the following conditions are met:
• The wide front view & panoramic view or the rear view & panoramic view is displayed.
• The vehicle speed is below approximately 7 mph (12 km/h).
• The intuitive parking assist is on.
● In the following situations, the magnified display will be canceled automatically:
• The vehicle speed is approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or higher.
• The intuitive parking assist is turned off.
235
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
 Touching one of the 4 areas within the dotted lines will magnify that area. (Dotted lines
are not displayed on the actual display.)
 To return to the normal view, touch the panoramic view display again.
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
7. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR PRECAUTIONS
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN
AREA OF IMAGE OF PANORAMIC VIEW
The panoramic view monitor displays an image of the surrounding view of the vehicle.
Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension objects (such as vehicle
bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher than the surface of the road. Even if there
is room between the bumpers of the vehicles and it seems not likely to collide in the
image, in reality, the both vehicles are on a collision course.
Check the safety of the surroundings directly.
*1
Capture range
Blind spot
*2
Capture range
*1:Objects located in the shaded areas will not be displayed on the screen.
*2: Parts of objects which extend above a certain height cannot be displayed on the screen.
236
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
INFORMATION
● When the intuitive parking assist display
is red or the buzzer continuously
sounds, be sure to check directly and do
not proceed any further. An unexpected
accident may occur, such as a vehicle
collision.
AREA OF THE IMAGE
CAPTURED BY THE CAMERA
Wide front view
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
● As the images obtained from four cameras are processed and displayed on
the standard of a flat road surface; the
panoramic
view/moving
view/seethrough view may be displayed as follows.
• Objects may look collapsed; thinner or
bigger than usual.
• An object with a higher position than
the road surface may look farther away
than it actually is or may not appear at
all.
• Tall objects may appear protruding
from the non-displayed areas of the
image.
● Variations in the brightness of the image
may appear for every camera.
● The displayed image may be shifted by
inclination of the vehicle body, change in
vehicle height, etc., depending on the
number of passengers, amount of luggage, fuel quantity, etc.
● If the front doors or back door are not
completely closed; neither the image nor
the guide lines are displayed.
● The position relations of the vehicle icon
and the road surface or obstacle may
differ from the actual positions.
● The black areas of the vicinity of the
vehicle icon are areas that are not captured by the camera.
● Images like the following are combined,
thus some areas may be difficult to view.
WARNING
237
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
Side views
238
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Rear view
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
Wide rear view
THE CAMERA
The cameras for the panoramic view
monitor are located as shown in the illustration.
Front camera
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Side cameras
INFORMATION
● Black masking is done for distance
detection differences to the front of the
vehicle.
● The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
● The area displayed on the screen may
vary depending on vehicle orientation or
road conditions.
● The camera uses a special lens. The
distance in the image displayed on the
screen will differ from the actual distance.
Rear camera
239
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
USING THE CAMERA
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering
to the camera, it cannot transmit a
clear image. In this case, flush it with a
large quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft and wet
cloth.
240
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NOTICE
● The panoramic view monitor may not
operate properly in the following cases.
• If the camera is hit, the position and
mounting angle of the camera may
change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble
or modify it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush
the camera with a large quantity of
water and wipe it with a soft and wet
cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens
may cause the camera lens to be
scratched and unable to transmit a
clear image.
• Do not allow an organic solvent, car
wax, window cleaner or a glass coating
to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly,
such as when hot water is poured on
the vehicle in cold weather, the system
may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not
apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may
result in the camera malfunctioning.
● Do not expose the camera to strong
impacts as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE SCREEN AND THE
ACTUAL ROAD
The distance guide lines will appear to
be closer to the vehicle than the actual
distance. Because of this, objects will
appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will
be a margin of error between the
guidelines and the actual distance/
course on the road.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
 The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking
space, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distances between the vehicle width
guide lines and the left and right dividing
lines of the parking space may not be
equal, even when they appear to be so.
Be sure to check visually.
 The distance guide lines give a distance
guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the
following situations, there is a margin of
error between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course on
the road.
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP
SHARPLY
241
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN
SHARPLY
The distance guide lines will appear to
be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects
will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on
the road.
WHEN ANY PART OF THE
VEHICLE SAGS
When any part of the vehicle sags due
to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin
of error between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course
on the road.
A margin of error
242
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
DISTORTION OF THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS ON THE
SCREEN
When there are three-dimensional objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) nearby
in positions higher than the surface of the road, take extra care when using the following.
PANORAMIC VIEW DISPLAY (INCLUDING MAGNIFIED DISPLAY)
Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension objects (such as vehicle
bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher than the surface of the road. Even if there
is room between the bumpers of the vehicles and it seems not likely to collide in the
image, in reality, the both vehicles are on a collision course.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING
● When the intuitive parking assist display is red or the buzzer continuously sounds, be
sure to check directly and do not proceed any further. An unexpected accident may
occur, such as a vehicle collision.
243
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS
The estimated course lines target flat
surfaced objects (such as the road). It
is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such
as vehicles) using the estimated
course lines and distance guide lines.
When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as
the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the
following.
ESTIMATED COURSE LINES
Since the estimated course line is displayed for a flat road surface, it can not
depict the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicle bumpers,
etc.) that are in positions higher than
the surface of the road. Even if the
bumpers of the vehicle is on the outside of the estimated course line in the
image, in reality, the vehicles are on a
collision course.
WARNING
● When the intuitive parking assist display
is red or the buzzer continuously
sounds, be sure to check directly and do
not proceed any further. An unexpected
accident may occur, such as a vehicle
collision.
Estimated course line
244
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
Three-dimensional objects (such as
the overhang of a wall or loading platform of a truck) in high positions may
not be projected on the screen. Check
the safety of the surroundings directly.
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. In the case
shown below, the truck appears to be
outside of the estimated course lines
and the vehicle does not look as if it
hits the truck. However, the rear body
of the truck may actually cross over the
estimated course lines. In reality if you
back up as guided by the estimated
course lines, the vehicle may hit the
truck.
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Estimated course lines
245
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
DISTANCE GUIDE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. On the
screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point B. However, in reality if you
back up to point A, you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that A is closest and C is farthest away. However, in
reality, the distance to A and C is the
same, and B is farther than A and C.
MAGNIFYING FUNCTION
When the panoramic view is magnified, walls and lines on the road on the
magnified panoramic view display may
look more distorted than those on the
normal panoramic view display.
Positions of A, B and C
C
A
B
C
B
A
INFORMATION
● When the panoramic view is magnified,
guide lines will not be displayed.
246
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
8. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the
solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Symptom
Solution
• The vehicle is in a dark
area
• The temperature around
the lens is either high or low
• The outside temperature is
low
• There are water droplets on
the camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is
adhering to the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the
camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent
lights,
sodium
lights, mercury lights etc.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again
once conditions have been
improved.)
The procedure for adjusting
the picture quality of the panoramic view monitor system
is the same as the procedure
for adjusting the navigation
screen. (→P.41)
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as
water droplets, snow, mud
etc.) is adhering to the camera.
Flush the camera with a large
quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft
and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding
area has received a strong
impact.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The image is difficult to see
247
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Likely cause
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
The guide lines are very far
out of alignment
The camera position is out of
alignment.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• The vehicle is tilted. (There
is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due
to a tire puncture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an
incline.
If this happens due to these
causes, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.
The estimated course lines
move even though the steering wheel is straight
There is a malfunction in the
signals being output by the
steering sensor.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Guide lines are not displayed
The back door is open.
Close the back door.
If this does not resolve the
symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The estimated course lines
are not displayed
• The steering wheel has been
moved while the 12-volt
battery was being reinstalled.
• 12-volt battery power is low.
• The steering sensor has
been reinstalled.
• There is a malfunction in
the signals being output by
the steering sensor.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The panoramic view display
cannot be magnified
The Intuitive parking assist
may be malfunctioning or
dirty.
Follow the correction procedures for malfunctions of the
Intuitive
parking
assist.
(→P.250)
The See-through view/Moving view cannot be displayed
248
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. PANORAMIC VIEW MONITOR
PRODUCT LICENSE
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
249
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST*
The distance to obstacles measured
by the sensors is communicated via
the display and a buzzer when parallel
parking or maneuvering into a garage.
Always check the surrounding area
when using this system.
TYPES OF SENSORS
DISPLAY
When the sensors detect an obstacle,
the graphic is shown on the multi-information display and navigation display
according to position and distance to
the obstacle.
■MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
*
*
*
Front corner sensors
Front corner sensors operation
Rear corner sensors
Rear corner sensors operation
Rear center sensors
*: if equipped
INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
SWITCH
1
*
Turns the intuitive parking assist on/off
Rear center sensors operation
*: if equipped
■SCREEN DISPLAY
When the vehicle is moving forward
 The graphic is automatically displayed
when an obstacle is detected. The screen
can be set so that the graphic is not displayed. (→P.257)
When the vehicle is moving backward
 A simplified image is displayed on the
screen when an obstacle is detected.
(→P.200, 228)
 When on, the indicator light comes on to
inform the driver that the system is operational.
*: If equipped
250
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
THE DISTANCE DISPLAY AND BUZZER
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance
to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
■Distance display
Sensors that detect an obstacle will illuminate continuously or blink.
Insert display
Display*1
Toyota parking
assist monitor
Panoramic
view monitor
Approximate distance to obstacle
Rear center sensor
4.9 to 2.0 ft.
(150 to 60 cm)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(blinking
slowly)
(blinking)
(blinking
rapidly)
⎯
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
(continuous)
Front and rear
corner sensor
(blinking
slowly)
2.0 to 1.6 ft.
(60 to 50 cm)
2.0 to 1.5 ft.
(60 to 45 cm)
1.6 to 1.3 ft.
(50 to 40 cm)
1.5 to 1.0 ft.
(45 to 30 cm)
(blinking)
(blinking
rapidly)
251
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
Insert display
Display*1
(blinking*2 or
Toyota parking
assist monitor
(continuous)
Panoramic
view monitor
Approximate distance to obstacle
Rear center sensor
Front and rear
corner sensor
Less than 1.3 ft.
(40 cm)
Less than 1.0 ft.
(30 cm)
(continuous)
continuous*3)
*1: The images may differ from that shown in the illustrations. (→P.250)
*2: Multi-information display
*3: Screen display
■Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
 The buzzer sounds faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer
sounds continuously.
• Front corner sensors: Approximately 30 cm
• Rear corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.3 ft. (40 cm)
 When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds
to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within the above distances, the beep will
repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.
INFORMATION
● Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (→P.256)
252
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
DETECTION RANGE OF THE
SENSORS
*
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
*: if equipped
 The diagram shows the detection range of
the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot
detect obstacles that are extremely close
to the vehicle.
 The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object etc.
Certain vehicle conditions and surrounding environments, such as the
following, may affect the ability of the
sensors to correctly detect objects.
Pay particular attention in the following
situations. Failure to do so may result
in the vehicle being driven unsafely,
possibly leading to an accident.
 There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
 A sensor is frozen.
 A sensor is covered in any way.
 The vehicle is leaning considerably to one
side.
 On an extremely bumpy road, on an
incline, on gravel, or on grass
 The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to
vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud
noises producing ultrasonic waves.
 There is another vehicle equipped with
parking assist-sensors in the vicinity.
 A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or
heavy rain.
 The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole
or radio antenna.
 Towing eyelets are installed.
 A bumper or sensor receives a strong
impact.
253
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
SENSOR DETECTION
INFORMATION
4. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
 The vehicle is approaching a tall or rightangled curb.
 In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
 A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
 People, animals and other moving objects
 People wearing certain types of clothing
 In addition to the examples above, there
are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be
judged by a sensor to be closer than
they are.
 The shape of the obstacle may prevent a
sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that
absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
254
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
WARNING
● Caution when using the intuitive parking
assist-sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle
being unable to be driven safely and
possibly cause an accident.
• Do not use the sensor at speeds in
excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Do not attach any accessories within
the sensor range.
● Even though sensors which are functioning properly continue to detect
obstacles, never use the intuitive parking assist if one more sensor(s) may be
malfunctioning.
NOTICE
● Notes when washing the vehicle
● Do not apply intensive bursts of water or
steam to the sensor area.
● Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
● As the intuitive parking assist-sensor
might be malfunctioning in the following
cases, have it checked by your Toyota
dealer.
• The graphic which indicates that an
obstacle has been detected does not
come on and a beep does not sound
even when the intuitive parking assist
mode is turned on.
• The graphic which indicates that an
obstacle has been detected comes on
despite no obstacle around the vehicle.
• If your vehicle has been involved in an
accident.
• If the graphic which indicates that an
obstacles has been detected remains
on without a beeping sound.
4. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
INTUITIVE PARKING ASSISTSENSOR FAILURE WARNING
If an error is detected when the intuitive
parking assist-sensor is turned on, the
vehicle symbol comes on or flashes
with beeping sounds.
INFORMATION
● The intuitive parking assist-sensor failure warning display is not given in either
of the following operations:
• Changing to another screen
• Turning off the main switch for the intuitive parking assist-sensor
WHEN THE SENSOR IS
MALFUNCTIONING
If “Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.” appears, have the intuitive
parking assist-sensor checked by your
Toyota dealer.
CERTIFICATION
For vehicles sold in Canada.
 This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
 Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la
norme NMB-001 du Canada.
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
WHEN SNOWFLAKES OR MUD
GETS ON THE SENSORS
If “Clean the parking assist sensor.”
appears, remove the foreign matter
from the sensor.
INFORMATION
● If the failure warning does not go off
even after the foreign matter is removed,
the intuitive parking assist-sensor may
be malfunctioning. Have it checked by
your Toyota dealer.
255
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6
4. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING
The volume of the beeps, turning on or
off of the display, etc. can be set.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
4
Select “Setup”.
5
Select the desired button.
Select “Vehicle”.
Select “TOYOTA Park Assist Settings”.
256
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
SETTING AN ALERT VOLUME
The alert volume can be adjusted.
1
Display the “TOYOTA Park Assist Settings” screen. (→P.256)
2
Select the desired screen button.
 The volume has 5 levels, increasing with
higher value.
4. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
SETTING A PARKING SONAR
DISPLAY
Parking sonar display can be set to on
or off.
SETTING A DISPLAY AND
TONE INDICATION
Back sensors display and tone indication can be set.
1
Display the “TOYOTA Park Assist Settings” screen. (→P.256)
1
Display the “TOYOTA Park Assist Settings” screen. (→P.256)
2
Select “Display Off” to turn off the
parking sonar display.
2
Select “Rear”.
6
257
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● Although “Display Off” is selected, if
the obstacle is detected during the
peripheral monitoring, the warning
appears on the screen.
 Selecting “Rear” to switch the distance
for the back sensors display and tone indication, from long distance to short distance, or from short distance to long
distance.
4. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
258
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7
1
PHONE
2
1
PHONE OPERATION (HANDSFREE SYSTEM FOR
CELLULAR PHONES)
1. QUICK REFERENCE................... 260
5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ...................................... 272
INCOMING CALL WAITING ................ 274
6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE
FUNCTION ................................ 275
RECEIVING A MESSAGE ................... 276
2. SOME BASICS ............................ 261
CHECKING MESSAGES..................... 276
REGISTERING/CONNECTING A
Bluetooth® PHONE ........................... 261
REPLYING TO A MESSAGE
(QUICK REPLY) ................................ 277
USING THE PHONE SWITCH/
MICROPHONE ................................. 262
CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER... 278
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM.............. 263
ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE
CONTACT LIST ................................ 264
2
1. PHONE/MESSAGE
SETTINGS................................. 280
3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE....................................... 265
PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS
SCREEN ........................................... 280
“Sound Settings” SCREEN .................. 281
BY FAVORITES LIST .......................... 266
BY CALL HISTORY ............................. 266
“Contact/Call History Settings”
SCREEN ........................................... 282
BY CONTACTS LIST .......................... 267
“Messaging Settings” SCREEN ........... 290
BY DIAL PAD ...................................... 269
“Phone Display Settings”
SCREEN ........................................... 291
BY OFF HOOK SWITCH ..................... 269
BY “Home” SCREEN ........................... 270
INCOMING CALLS.............................. 271
3
WHAT TO DO IF...
1. TROUBLESHOOTING ................ 292
259
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4
5
6
7
SETUP
WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING
OF THE VEHICLE............................. 264
4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE....................................... 271
3
8
9
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
1. QUICK REFERENCE
The phone top screen can be used to make a phone call. To display the hands-free
operation screen, press the “APPS” button and select “Phone”, the
on the steering wheel or
switch
switch on the instrument panel.
Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is displayed by selecting the 4 tabs.
Function
Page
Registering/connecting Bluetooth® phone
Calling on the
Bluetooth®
Phone operation
Message function
Setting up a phone
260
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
phone
®
44
265
Receiving on the Bluetooth phone
271
Talking on the Bluetooth® phone
272
Using the Bluetooth® phone message function
275
Phone settings
280
Bluetooth®
51
settings
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
2. SOME BASICS
The hands-free system enables calls
to be made and received without having to take your hands off the steering
wheel.
This system supports Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth® is a wireless data system
that enables cellular phones to be used
without being connected by a cable or
placed in a cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone
is explained here.
WARNING
● While driving, do not use a cellular
phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users
of any electrical medical device other
than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter
defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information
about its operation under the influence
of radio waves. Radio waves could have
unexpected effects on the operation of
such medical devices.
● If your cellular phone does not support
Bluetooth®, this system cannot function.
● In the following conditions, the system
may not function:
• The cellular phone is turned off.
• The current position is outside the
communication area.
• The cellular phone is not connected.
• The cellular phone has a low battery.
● When using Bluetooth® audio and
hands-free at the same time, the following problems may occur:
• The Bluetooth® connection may be
cut.
• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®
audio playback.
REGISTERING/CONNECTING
A Bluetooth® PHONE
To use the hands-free system for cellular phones, it is necessary to register a
cellular phone with the system.
(→P.44)
Bluetooth® PHONE CONDITION
DISPLAY
The condition of the Bluetooth® phone
appears on the upper right side of the
screen. (→P.18)
NOTICE
● Do not leave your cellular phone in the
vehicle. The temperature inside may rise
to a level that could damage the phone.
261
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7
PHONE
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers
or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators
should maintain a reasonable distance
between themselves and the Bluetooth®
antennas. The radio waves may affect
the operation of such devices.
INFORMATION
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
USING THE PHONE SWITCH/
MICROPHONE
STEERING SWITCH
MICROPHONE
The microphone is used when talking
on the phone.
Type A
By pressing the phone switch, a call
can be received or ended without taking your hands off the steering wheel.
Type B
Volume control switch
 Press the “+” switch to increase the volume.
 Press the “-” switch to decrease the volume.
Off hook switch
On hook switch
262
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.
 The voice command system and its list
of commands can be operated.
(→P.168)
INFORMATION
263
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7
PHONE
● The other party’s voice will be heard
from the front speakers. The audio/
visual system will be muted during
phone calls or when hands-free voice
commands are used.
● Talk alternately with the other party on
the phone. If both parties speak at the
same time, the other party may not hear
what has been said. (This is not a malfunction.)
● Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the
other party’s voice may be audible outside the vehicle and voice echo may
increase. When talking on the phone,
speak clearly towards the microphone.
● The other party may not hear you clearly
when:
• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making
excessive traffic noise.)
• Driving at high speeds.
• The roof or windows are open.
• The air conditioning vents are pointed
towards the microphone.
• The sound of the air conditioning fan is
loud.
• There is a negative effect on sound
quality due to the phone and/or network being used.
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN
THE CONTACT LIST
 The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is
connected, the following registered data
cannot be read:
• Contact data
• Call history data
• Favorites data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
INFORMATION
● When a phone’s registration is deleted,
the above-mentioned data is also
deleted.
WHEN SELLING OR
DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE
A lot of personal data is registered
when the hands-free system is used.
When selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize the data. (→P.64)
 The following data in the system can be
initialized:
• Contact data
• Call history data
• Favorites data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
INFORMATION
● Once initialized, the data and settings
will be erased. Pay much attention when
initializing the data.
264
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
After a Bluetooth® phone has been
registered, a call can be made using
the hands-free system. There are several methods by which a call can be
made, as described below.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
How to make a call list
By favorites list
266
By call history
266
By contacts list*1
267
By dial pad*1
269
By e-mail/SMS/MMS
278
By POI call*
2
3
Select “Phone”.
Select the desired tab to call from.
Page
2
312
By off hook switch
269
By Entune App Suite*1, 2
378
By voice command system
172
By “Home” screen
270
*1: The operation cannot be performed while
driving.
*2: Entune Premium Audio only
7
PHONE
 The phone top screen can be displayed by
pressing the
wheel or
panel.
switch on the steering
switch on the instrument
265
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
BY FAVORITES LIST
BY CALL HISTORY
Calls can be made using registered
contacts which can be selected from a
contact list. (→P.287)
Up to 30 of the latest call history items
(missed, incoming and outgoing) can
be selected from the “Call History” tab.
1
Display the
(→P.265)
screen.
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select the “Favorites” tab and select
the desired contact.
2
Select the “Call History” tab and se-
Select the desired number.
 The icons of call type are displayed.
3
4
phone
top
lect
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
phone
top
screen.
or the desired contact.
: Missed call
: Incoming call
: Outgoing call
When
3
is selected
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
When the desired contact is selected
3
4
266
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Select the desired number.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
INFORMATION
● When making a call to the same number
continuously, only the most recent call is
listed in call history.
● When a phone number registered in the
contact list is received, the name is displayed.
● Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system.
● International phone calls may not be
made depending on the type of cellular
phone you have.
● The list should group together consecutive entries with the same phone number
and same call type. For example, two
calls from Kay Rowles’s mobile would
be displayed as follows: Kay Rowles (2)
BY CONTACTS LIST
Calls can be made by using contact
data which is transferred from a registered cellular phone. (→P.268)
Up to 2500 contacts (maximum of 4
phone numbers and e-mail addresses
per contact) can be registered in the
contact list.
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select the “Contacts” tab and select
the desired contact.
phone
top
screen.
● By pressing the
switch on the
steering wheel, a call to the latest history
item can be made.
7
PHONE
3
4
Select the desired number.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
267
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
WHEN THE CONTACT IS
EMPTY
■FOR
PBAP
COMPATIBLE
®
Bluetooth PHONES
■FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUT
OPP COMPATIBLE
PHONES
1
Bluetooth®
Select the desired item.
When “Automatic Transfer” is set to on
(→P.282)
 Contacts are transferred automatically.
When “Automatic Transfer” is set to off
(→P.282)
1
Select the desired item.
No.
Function
Select to transfer the contacts from
the connected cellular phone.
Select to add a new contact manually.
Select to cancel transferring.
No.
Function
Select to transfer new contacts from
a cellular phone, select “Always”
and then enable “Automatic Transfer”.
Select to transfer all the contacts
from a connected cellular phone
only once.
Select to cancel transferring.
2
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
268
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
When “Transfer” is selected
2
Follow the steps in “FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUT OPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth® PHONES” from
“STEP 2”. (→P.283)
When “Add” is selected
2
Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACT
LIST” from “STEP 2”. (→P.284)
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
INFORMATION
● Manual transfer operation cannot be
performed while driving.
● If your cellular phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred.
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone:
• It may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone when transferring contact data.
• The registered image in the contact list
may not transfer depending on the
type of Bluetooth® phone connected.
BY DIAL PAD
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter the
phone number.
3
Select
or press the
on the steering wheel.
4
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
phone
top
screen.
switch
BY OFF HOOK SWITCH
Calls can be made using the latest call
history item.
1
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to display the phone top screen.
2
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to display the “Call History”
screen.
3
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to call the latest history item.
4
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
269
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
PHONE
INFORMATION
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on
the phone.
7
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
BY “Home” SCREEN
1
2
Display the home screen. (→P.37)
3
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
Select the desired contact.
REGISTERING A NEW
CONTACT
1
Select and hold the screen button to
add a contact.
2
3
Select the desired contact.
Select the desired number.
INFORMATION
● If there is no contact in the contacts list,
the contacts cannot be registered at the
home screen.
● The contact cannot be registered at the
home screen while driving.
270
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
INCOMING CALLS
When a call is received, this screen is
displayed with a sound.
1
Select
or press the
switch
on the steering wheel to talk on the
phone.
To refuse to receive the call: Select
or press the
switch on the
steering wheel.
To adjust the volume of a received call:
Turn the “PWR•VOL” knob, or use the volume control switch on the steering wheel.
7
PHONE
INFORMATION
● During international phone calls, the
other party’s name or number may not
be displayed correctly depending on the
type of cellular phone you have.
● The incoming call display mode can be
set. (→P.291)
● The ringtone that has been set in the
“Sound Settings” screen sounds when
there is an incoming call. Depending on
the type of Bluetooth® phone, both the
system and Bluetooth® phone may
sound simultaneously when there is an
incoming call. (→P.281)
271
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
While talking on the phone, this screen
is displayed. The operations outlined
below can be performed on this
screen.
No.
Function
Page
Select to display the dial
pad to send tones.
272
Select to mute your voice
to the other party.
⎯
Select to change handset
modes between handsfree and cellular phone.
⎯
Select to adjust your voice
volume that the other party
hears from their speaker.
273
Select to send tones. This
button only appears when
a number that contains a
(w) is dialed in hands-free
mode.
273
Select to hang up the
phone.
⎯
Select “+” or “-” to adjust
the volume of the other party’s voice.
⎯
Select to start talking with
the other party.
274
272
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
INFORMATION
● Changing from hands-free call to cellular
phone call is not possible while driving.
● When cellular phone call is changed to
hands-free call, the hands-free screen
will be displayed and its functions can be
operated on the screen.
● Changing between cellular phone call
and hands-free call can be performed by
operating the cellular phone directly.
● Transferring methods and operations
will be different depending on the type of
cellular phone you have.
● For the operation of the cellular phone,
see the manual that comes with it.
SENDING TONES
■BY DIAL PAD
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
1
Select “0-9”.
2
Enter the desired number.
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
■BY SELECTING “Release Tones”
“Release Tones” appear when a continuous tone signal(s) containing a (w)
is registered in the contact list.
TRANSMIT VOLUME SETTING
1
2
Select “Transmit Volume”.
3
Select “OK”.
This operation can be performed while
driving.
1
Select the desired level for the transmit
volume.
Select “Release Tones”.
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
● The sound quality of the voice heard
from the other party’s speaker may be
negatively impacted.
● To reset the transmit volume, select
“Default”.
● “Transmit Volume” is dimmed when
mute is on.
273
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7
PHONE
● A continuous tone signal is a character
string that consists of numbers and the
characters
p
or
w.
(e.g.
056133w0123p#1)
● When the “p” pause tone is used, the
tone data up until the next pause tone
will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w” pause
tone is used, the tone data up until the
next pause tone will be automatically
sent after a user operation is performed.
● Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based service such as an answering machine or
bank phone service is desired. A phone
number with continuous tone signals
can be registered in the contact list.
● Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be
operated on voice command during a
call.
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
INCOMING CALL WAITING
When a call is interrupted by a third
party while talking, this screen is displayed.
1
Select
or press the
switch
on the steering wheel to start talking
with the other party.
To refuse to receive the call: Select
or press the
steering wheel.
switch on the
 Each time
is selected or the
switch on the steering wheel is pressed
during an interrupted call, the party who is
on hold will be switched.
INFORMATION
● This function may not be available
depending on the type of cellular phone.
274
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION
Received messages can be forwarded
from the connected Bluetooth® phone,
enabling checking and replying using
the system.
3
If the phone does not support the message function, this function cannot be
used.
1
.
 The phone top screen can be displayed by
switch on the steering
pressing the
Bluetooth®
Depending on the type of
phone connected, received messages
may not be transferred to the message
inbox.
Select
wheel or
panel.
4
switch on the instrument
Check that the message inbox screen
is displayed.
Press the “APPS” button.
: Select to change to phone mode.
7
Function
Select “Phone”.
Receiving a message
276
Checking messages
276
Replying to a message (quick reply)
277
Calling the message sender
278
Message settings
290
 You can also display the message inbox
screen to select “Messages”. (→STEP4)
275
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
PHONE
2
Page
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
RECEIVING A MESSAGE
When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen
pops up with sound and is ready to be
operated on the screen.
No.
CHECKING MESSAGES
1
Display the message inbox screen.
(→P.275)
2
Select the desired message from the
list.
3
Check that the message is displayed.
Function
Select to check the message.
No.
Select to not open the message.
Select to call the message sender.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the cellular phone used
for receiving messages, or its registration status with the system, some information may not be displayed.
● The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/MMS
messages under the following conditions:
E-mail:
• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to “Full
Screen”. (→P.290)
• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on.
(→P.290)
SMS/MMS:
• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is set to
“Full Screen”. (→P.290)
• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set
to on. (→P.290)
276
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
*
Function
Select “Mark Unread” or “Mark
Read” to mark mail unread or read
on the message inbox screen.
This function is available when “Update Read Status on Phone” is set to
on. (→P.290)
Select to
(→P.277)
reply
the
message.
Select to display the previous or
next message.
Select to have messages read out.
To cancel this function, select
“Stop”.
When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to on, messages will be
automatically read out. (→P.290)
Select to make a call to the sender.
*: E-mail only
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
INFORMATION
● Reading a text message is not available
while driving.
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps on
the phone.
● Messages are displayed in the
appropriate
connected
Bluetooth®
phone’s registered mail address folder.
Select the tab of the desired folder to be
displayed.
● Only received messages on the
connected Bluetooth® phone can be
displayed.
● The text of the message is not displayed
while driving.
● Turn the “PWR•VOL” knob, or use the
volume control switch on the steering
wheel to adjust the message read out
volume.
REPLYING TO A MESSAGE
(QUICK REPLY)
15 messages have already been
stored.
1
Display the message inbox screen.
(→P.275)
2
Select the desired message from the
list.
3
Select “Quick Message”.
7
Select the desired message.
PHONE
4
5
Select “Send”.
 While the message is being sent, a sending message screen is displayed.
 To cancel sending the message, select
“Cancel”.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone, reply function is not available.
277
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
■EDITING QUICK REPLY MESSAGES
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
1
Select “Quick Message”.
CALLING THE MESSAGE
SENDER
Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/
MMS message sender’s phone number.
This operation can be performed while
driving.
■CALLING FROM E-MAIL/SMS/MMS
MESSAGE DISPLAY
2
Select
corresponding to the desired message to edit.
3
Select “OK” when editing is completed.
1
Display the message inbox screen.
(→P.275)
2
Select the desired message.
3
Select
.
INFORMATION
● To reset the editquick reply messages,
select “Default”.
● “Quick Message 1” (“I am driving and
will arrive in approximately [ETA]
minutes.”)*:
This message cannot be edited and will
automatically fill in [ETA] with the
navigation calculated estimated time of
arrival on the confirm message screen.
If there are waypoints set, [ETA] to the
next waypoint will be shown.
If there is no route currently set in the
navigation system, “Quick Message 1”
cannot be selected.
*: Entune Premium Audio only
278
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
 If there are 2 or more phone numbers,
select the desired number.
4
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
■CALLING FROM A NUMBER WITHIN A MESSAGE
Calls can be made to a number identified in a message’s text area.
■CALLING FROM THE INCOMING
MESSAGE SCREEN
→P.276
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
1
Display the message inbox screen.
(→P.275)
2
3
Select the desired message.
Select the text area.
7
PHONE
4
Select the desired number.
 Identified phone numbers contained in the
message are displayed.
5
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
INFORMATION
● A series of numbers may be recognized
as a phone number. Additionally, some
phone numbers may not be recognized,
such as those for other countries.
279
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. SETUP
1. PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
Select “Setup”.
3
4
Select “Phone”.
DISPLAYING THE PHONE/
MESSAGE SETTINGS SCREEN
IN A DIFFERENT WAY
Select the item to be set.
PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS
SCREEN
No.
Information
Registering/connecting
phone
Page
a
Sound settings
Contact/call
tings
history
51
281
set-
282
Messaging settings
290
Phone display settings
291
280
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select “Settings”.
phone
top
screen.
2. SETUP
“Sound Settings” SCREEN
The call and ringtone volume can be
adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.
1
2
3
Display the “Phone/Message Settings”
screen. (→P.280)
Select “Sound Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
No.
Function
Select to set the desired ringtone.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ringtone volume.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the message readout volume.
Select to set the desired incoming
SMS/MMS tone.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incoming SMS/MMS tone volume.
Select to set the desired incoming email tone.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the default volume of the other party’s
voice.
PHONE
Select to reset all setup items.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the type of phone, certain
functions may not be available.
281
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7
2. SETUP
“Contact/Call History
Settings” SCREEN
No.
Function
Page
For PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones, select
to set automatic contact/
history transfer on/off.
When set to on, the
phone’s contact data and
history are automatically
transferred.
⎯
Select to update contacts
from the connected phone.
283
Select to sort contacts by
the first name or last name
field.
⎯
Select to add contacts to
the favorites list.
287
Select to delete contacts
from the favorites list.
289
Select to set the transferred contact image display on/off.
⎯
*
Select to clear contacts
from the call history.
⎯
*
Select to add new contacts
to the contact list.
284
*
Select to edit contacts in
the contact list.
285
*
Select to delete contacts
from the contact list.
286
Select to reset all setup
items.
⎯
The contact can be transferred from a
Bluetooth® phone to the system. The
contact also can be added, edited and
deleted.
The call history can be deleted and
contact and favorites can be changed.
1
Display the “Phone/Message Settings”
screen. (→P.280)
2
Select “Contact/Call History Settings”.
3
Select the desired item to be set.
*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®
phones, this function is available when
“Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
(→P.282)
282
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. SETUP
■FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUT
INFORMATION
● Depending on the type of phone, certain
functions may not be available.
● Contact data is managed independently
for every registered phone. When one
phone is connected, another phone’s
registered data cannot be read.
UPDATE CONTACTS FROM
PHONE
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred.
COMPATIBLE
Bluetooth® PHONES
1
Select “Update
Phone”.
Contacts
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
1
Select “Update
Phone”.
2
Transfer the contact data to the system
Contacts
from
 This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cellular phone.
 Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring contact data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
 To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.
3
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
from
 Contacts are transferred automatically.
2
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
 This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cellular phone.
 Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring contact data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
 If another Bluetooth® device is connected
when transferring contact data, depending
on the phone, the connected Bluetooth®
device may need to be disconnected.
 Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the
phone.
283
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7
PHONE
PBAP
Bluetooth®
using a Bluetooth® phone.
Operation methods differ between
PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®
phones.
■FOR
OPP COMPATIBLE
PHONES
2. SETUP
■UPDATING THE CONTACTS IN A
REGISTERING A NEW
CONTACT TO THE CONTACT
LIST
DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE “Call
History” SCREEN)
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®
phones, this function is available when
“Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
(→P.282)
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet registered in the
contact list.
3
4
5
phone
top
screen.
Select “Update Contact”.
Select the desired contact.
Select a phone type for the phone
number.
284
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
New contact data can be registered.
Up to 4 numbers per person can be
registered. For PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones, this function is
available when “Automatic Transfer” is
set to off. (→P.282)
1
2
3
Select “New Contact”.
4
Select the phone type for the phone
number.
5
To add another number to this contact,
select “Yes”.
Enter the name and select “OK”.
Enter the phone number and select
“OK”.
2. SETUP
■REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT IN
A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE
“Call History” SCREEN)
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet registered in the
contact list.
3
4
phone
top
screen.
EDITING THE CONTACT DATA
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®
phones, this function is available when
“Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
(→P.282)
1
2
Select “Edit Contacts”.
3
Select
corresponding to the desired name or number.
Select the desired contact.
Select “Add to Contacts”.
Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACT
LIST” from “STEP 2”. (→P.284)
7
4
Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACT
LIST” from “STEP 2”. (→P.284)
For editing the number
4
Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACT
LIST” from “STEP 3”. (→P.284)
285
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
PHONE
For editing the name
2. SETUP
■EDITING THE CONTACT IN A DIF-
DELETING THE CONTACT
DATA
FERENT WAY (FROM THE “Contact
Details” SCREEN)
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”
tab or the “Favorites” tab and select
the desired contact.
3
phone
top
screen.
Select “Edit Contact”.
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®
phones, this function is available when
“Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
(→P.282)
1
2
Select “Delete Contacts”.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Select the desired contact and select
“Delete”.
INFORMATION
● Multiple data can be selected and
deleted at the same time.
“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display all
registered e-mail addresses for the contact.
4
Follow the steps in “EDITING THE
CONTACT DATA” from “STEP 3”.
(→P.285)
286
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. SETUP
■DELETING THE CONTACT IN A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE “Contact
Details” SCREEN)
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”
tab or the “Favorites” tab and select
the desired contact.
3
4
phone
top
screen.
Select “Delete Contact”.
FAVORITES LIST SETTING
Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be registered in
the favorites list.
■REGISTERING THE CONTACTS IN
THE FAVORITES LIST
1
2
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Select “Add Favorite”.
Select the desired contact to add to the
favorites list.
INFORMATION
● When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted,
the contact data will be deleted at the
same time.
7
3
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
287
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
PHONE
 Dimmed contacts are already stored as a
favorite.
2. SETUP
When 15 contacts have already been
registered to the favorites list
1
When 15 contacts have already been
registered to the favorites list, a registered contact needs to be replaced.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears to replace a contact.
2
Select the contact to be replaced.
3
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
Registering contacts in the favorites list
in a different way (from the “Contacts”
screen)
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
3
Select the “Contacts” tab.
phone
top
screen.
Select  at the beginning of the desired contact list name to be registered
in the favorites list.
 When selected,  is changed to , and
the contact is registered in the favorites
list.
Registering contacts in the favorites list
in a different way (from the “Contact Details” screen)
288
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select the “Contacts” tab or the “Call
History” tab and select the desired
contact.
3
4
Select “Add Favorite”.
phone
top
screen.
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
2. SETUP
■DELETING THE CONTACTS IN THE
FAVORITES LIST
1
2
Select “Remove Favorite”.
Select the desired contacts and select
“Remove”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
4
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
3
Select the “Contacts” tab.
phone
top
screen.
Select  at the beginning of the contact list name to be deleted from the favorites list.
, and
7
Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a
different way (from the “Contact Details”
screen)
PHONE
3
Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a
different way (from the “Contacts”
screen)
 When selected,  is changed to
the data is deleted from the list.
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”
tab or the “Favorites” tab and select
the desired contact to delete.
3
4
Select “Remove Favorite”.
5
Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
phone
top
screen.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
289
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. SETUP
“Messaging Settings”
SCREEN
1
Display the “Phone/Message Settings”
screen. (→P.280)
2
3
Select “Messaging Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
No.
Function
Select to set automatic message
transfer on/off.
Select to set automatic message
readout on/off.
Select to set the SMS/MMS notification popup on/off.
Select to set the e-mail notification
popup on/off.
Select to set adding the vehicle signature to outgoing messages on/off.
Select to set updating message read
status on phone on/off.
Select to change the incoming SMS/
MMS display.
“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS
message is received, the incoming
SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the
screen.
“Drop-down”: When an SMS/MMS
message is received, a message is
displayed on the upper side of the
screen.
Select to change the incoming e-mail
display.
“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display
screen is the displayed and can be
operated on the screen.
“Drop-down”: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on the
upper side of the screen.
Select to set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off.
When set to on, messaging account
names used on the cellular phone will
be displayed.
Select to reset all setup items.
290
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. SETUP
INFORMATION
● Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available.
DISPLAYING THE “Messaging
Settings” SCREEN IN A
DIFFERENT WAY
1
Display the
(→P.265)
2
Select “Settings”.
3
Select “Messaging Settings”.
phone
top
“Phone Display Settings”
SCREEN
1
Display the “Phone/Message Settings”
screen. (→P.280)
2
3
Select “Phone Display Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
screen.
No.
Function
Select to set display of the contact/
history transfer completion message
on/off.
Select to reset all setup items.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available.
291
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
7
PHONE
Select to change the incoming call
display.
“Full Screen”: When a call is received, the hands-free screen is displayed and can be operated on the
screen.
“Drop-down”: A message is displayed on the upper side of the
screen.
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® device, first check
the table below.
When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device
Page
Symptom
Likely cause
The connected device may not be a
compatible
The hands-free sys-
Bluetooth® cellular
phone.
tem or Bluetooth® device does not work.
The Bluetooth® version of the connected cellular phone
may be older than
the specified version.
292
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Solution
For a list of specific
devices
which
operation has been
confirmed
on
this
system, check with
your Toyota dealer or
the following website:
http://www.toyota.com/
entune/
Cellular
phone
This
system
∗
⎯
∗
46
Use a cellular phone
with Bluetooth® version 2.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 3.0
+EDR or higher).
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
When registering/connecting a cellular phone
Page
Symptom
A cellular phone cannot be registered.
Likely cause
Solution
An incorrect passcode was entered
on
the
cellular
phone.
Cellular
phone
This
system
Enter the correct passcode on the cellular
phone.
∗
⎯
The registration operation has not been
completed on the
cellular phone side.
Complete the registration operation on the
cellular phone (approve registration on
the phone).
∗
⎯
Old registration information remains
on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Delete the existing registration
information
from both this system
and the cellular phone,
then register the cellular phone you wish to
connect to this system.
∗
53
Another Bluetooth®
device is already
connected.
Manually connect the
cellular phone you wish
to use to this system.
⎯
54
Bluetooth® function
is not enabled on
the cellular phone.
Enable the Bluetooth®
function on the cellular
phone.
∗
⎯
⎯
58
PHONE
Set
7
automatic
Bluetooth® connection
on this system to on
when the engine <power> switch is in following.
A Bluetooth® connection cannot be made.
Automatic
®
Bluetooth connection on this system
is set to off.
Vehicles without a
smart key system
The engine switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a
smart key system
The engine <power>
switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
<ON> mode.
293
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
Page
Symptom
“Unable
to
Please check
phone.”
dial.
your
Likely cause
Solution
Bluetooth® function
is not enabled on
the cellular phone.
Old registration information remains
on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Cellular
phone
This
system
Enable the Bluetooth®
function on the cellular
phone.
∗
⎯
Delete the existing registration
information
from both this system
and the cellular phone,
then register the cellular phone you wish to
connect to this system.
∗
53
When making/receiving a call
Page
Symptom
A call cannot
made/received.
be
294
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Likely cause
Solution
Your vehicle is in a
“No Service” area.
Move to where “No
Service” no longer appears on the display.
Cellular
phone
This
system
⎯
⎯
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
When using the phonebook
Page
Symptom
Phonebook data cannot be transferred
manually/automatically.
Solution
Cellular
phone
This
system
The profile version
of the connected
cellular phone may
not be compatible
with
transferring
phonebook data.
For a list of specific
devices
which
operation has been
confirmed
on
this
system, check with
your Toyota dealer or
the following website:
http://www.toyota.com/
entune/
∗
⎯
Automatic contact
transfer function on
this system is set to
off.
Set automatic contact
transfer function on this
system to on.
⎯
282
Passcode has not
been entered on the
cellular phone.
Enter the passcode on
the cellular phone if requested (default passcode: 1234).
∗
⎯
Transfer operation
on
the
cellular
phone has not completed.
Complete transfer operation on the cellular
phone (approve transfer operation on the
phone).
∗
⎯
Automatic contact
transfer function on
this system is set to
on.
Set automatic contact
transfer function on this
system to off.
⎯
282
7
PHONE
Phonebook data cannot be edited.
Likely cause
295
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
When using the Bluetooth® message function
Page
Symptom
Messages cannot be
viewed.
New message notifications are not displayed.
296
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Likely cause
Solution
Message transfer is
not enabled on the
cellular phone.
Cellular
phone
This
system
Enable message transfer on the cellular
phone (approve message transfer on the
phone).
∗
⎯
Automatic transfer
function on this system is set to off.
Set automatic transfer
function on this system
to on.
⎯
290
Notification of SMS/
MMS/E-mail reception on this system
is set to off.
Set notification of SMS/
MMS/E-mail reception
on this system to on.
∗
290
Automatic message
transfer function is
not enabled on the
cellular phone.
Enable
automatic
transfer function on the
cellular phone.
∗
⎯
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
In other situations
Page
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
Connection confirmation display on
this system is set to
on.
To turn off the display,
set connection confirmation display on this
system to off.
Cellular
phone
This
system
⎯
57
The Bluetooth® connection status is displayed at the top of
the screen each time
the engine <power>
switch is in following.
Vehicles without
a smart key system
The engine switch is
in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
Vehicles with a
smart key system
7
PHONE
The engine <power>
switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON <ON> mode.
297
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
Page
Symptom
Even though all conceivable
measures
have been taken, the
symptom status does
not change.
Likely cause
Solution
The cellular phone
is not close enough
to this system.
Radio interference
has occurred.
Cellular
phone
This
system
Bring
the
cellular
phone closer to this
system.
⎯
⎯
Turn off Wi-Fi® devices
or other devices that
may emit radio waves.
⎯
⎯
Turn the cellular phone
off, remove and reinstall the battery pack,
and then restart the
cellular phone.
∗
⎯
∗
⎯
Disable the Wi-Fi®
connection of the cellular phone.
∗
⎯
Stop
the
cellular
phone’s security software and close all applications.
∗
⎯
Before using an application installed on the
cellular phone, carefully check its source and
how its operation might
affect this system.
∗
⎯
Enable
the
cellular
phone’s
Bluetooth®
connection.
The cellular phone
is the most likely
cause of the symptom.
∗: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.
298
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. WHAT TO DO IF...
7
PHONE
299
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM*
1
BASIC OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE ................... 302
MAP SCREEN ..................................... 302
NAVIGATION OPTIONS
SCREEN ........................................... 304
2
DESTINATION SEARCH
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
SCREEN .................................... 317
2. SEARCH OPERATION................ 319
SELECTING SEARCH AREA .............. 320
2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION ....... 305
CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY ......... 305
MAP SCALE ........................................ 305
ORIENTATION OF THE MAP ............. 306
SWITCHING THE MAP MODE............ 307
SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION ........ 309
ADJUSTING LOCATION IN SMALL
INCREMENTS................................... 309
SETTING HOME AS
DESTINATION................................... 320
SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS
AS DESTINATION............................. 320
SEARCHING BY ADDRESS................ 321
SEARCHING BY POINT OF
INTEREST ......................................... 322
SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS ................................ 325
3. MAP
SCREEN INFORMATION .......... 310
SEARCHING BY ADDRESS
BOOK ................................................ 325
DISPLAYING MAP
INFORMATION ................................. 310
SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY .......... 326
DISPLAYING INFORMATION
ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE
CURSOR IS SET .............................. 312
SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION
AND FREEWAY ................................ 326
SEARCHING BY MAP ......................... 328
SEARCHING BY COORDINATES....... 328
STANDARD MAP ICONS .................... 313
4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION ............ 314
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC
INFORMATION ON THE MAP.......... 316
300
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. STARTING ROUTE
GUIDANCE................................ 329
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE.......... 329
PAUSING GUIDANCE ......................... 332
8
1
NAVIGATION SYSTEM*
2
3
SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK.......... 348
ROUTE GUIDANCE
SETTING UP AREAS TO
AVOID ............................................... 350
1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN..... 333
DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS ................................ 352
SCREEN FOR ROUTE
GUIDANCE ....................................... 333
3
4
ROUTE OVERVIEW............................ 334
DURING FREEWAY DRIVING............ 335
WHEN APPROACHING
INTERSECTION ............................... 336
TURN LIST SCREEN .......................... 337
5
1. DETAILED NAVIGATION
SETTINGS................................. 353
7
2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS................... 357
SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC
SETTINGS ........................................ 357
3. EDITING ROUTE ......................... 339
AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC....................... 358
ADDING DESTINATIONS ................... 340
MY TRAFFIC ROUTES ....................... 359
DELETING DESTINATIONS ............... 340
SELECTING ROUTE TYPE ................ 341
DETOUR SETTING ............................. 342
4
MEMORY POINTS
1. MEMORY POINTS
SETTINGS ................................. 344
SETTING UP HOME ........................... 345
SETTING UP PRESET
DESTINATIONS................................ 346
6
TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM)................................... 363
LIMITATIONS OF THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM..................... 363
2. MAP DATABASE VERSION
AND COVERED AREA ............. 365
MAP INFORMATION ........................... 365
ABOUT THE MAP DATA ..................... 366
*: Entune Premium Audio only
301
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
9
REORDERING DESTINATIONS......... 340
SETTING ROUTE
PREFERENCES ............................... 341
6
SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS ........................................ 353
TURN-BY-TURN ARROW
SCREEN ........................................... 337
2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE
PROMPTS.................................. 338
5
SETUP
1. BASIC OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
MAP SCREEN
To display this screen, press the “APPS” button, then select “Navigation” on the
“Apps” screen.
No.
Name
Function
Page
2D North-up, 2D
heading-up or 3D
heading-up symbol
Indicates whether the map orientation is set to
north-up or heading-up. The letter(s) beside this
symbol indicate the vehicle’s heading direction
(e.g. N for north). In 3D map, only a heading-up
view is available.
306
Options button
Select to display the “Navigation Options” screen.
304
“GPS” mark
(Global Positioning System)
Shows that the vehicle is receiving signals from
the GPS.
363
Traffic indicator
Shows that traffic information is received. Select
to start voice guidance for traffic information.
When traffic information is received via HD Radio
broadcast, HD mark is displayed on the right.
314
Scale indicator
This figure indicates the map scale.
305
302
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC OPERATION
No.
Name
Function
Page
Zoom in/out button
Select to magnify or reduce the map scale. When
either button is selected, the map scale indicator
bar appears at the bottom of the screen.
305
Current position
button/voice
guidance button
• Select to display the current position address.
• Select to repeat voice guidance.
338
Destination
ton
Select to display the “Destination” screen.
317
Speed limit icon
Indicates the speed limit on the current road. The
display of the speed limit icon can be set to on/off.
310
Route information bar
Displays the current street name, or the distance
with the estimated travel time/arrival time to the
destination. The route information bar fills from
left to right as the vehicle progresses on the
route.
333
Route information button
Select to change the display between the current
street name and the distance with the estimated
travel/arrival time.
333
but-
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
303
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC OPERATION
NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN
The navigation options allow you to change map configurations, display/hide POI
icons, and edit the navigation routes. To display the “Navigation Options” screen,
press the “APPS” button, select “Navigation” on the “Apps” screen, and select
“Options” on the map screen.
No.
Function
Page
Select to change the map configuration.
307
Select to change the displayed map information such as POI icons,
route trace, speed limit, etc.
310
Select to display the map version and coverage area.
365
Select to edit the set route.
339
Select to pause or resume route guidance.
332
Select to display the overview of the entire route.
334
304
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC OPERATION
2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION
CURRENT POSITION
DISPLAY
1
Press the “APPS” button.
MAP SCALE
1
Select
or
to change the
scale of the map screen.
 The scale indicator bar appears at the bottom of the screen.
2
3
Select “Navigation”.
Check that the current position map is
displayed.
 Select and hold
or
to continue changing the scale of the map
screen.
 The scale of the map screen can also be
changed by selecting the scale bar
directly. This function is not available while
driving.
8
INFORMATION
 To correct the current position manually:→P.355
INFORMATION
● While driving, the current position mark
is fixed on the screen and the map
moves.
● The current position is automatically set
as the vehicle receives signals from the
GPS (Global Positioning System). If the
current position is not correct, it is automatically corrected after the vehicle
receives signals from the GPS.
● After the 12-volt battery disconnection,
or on a new vehicle, the current position
may not be correct. As soon as the system receives signals from the GPS, the
correct current position is displayed.
305
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
● The map scale is displayed above the
zoom in button at the bottom left of the
screen.
1. BASIC OPERATION
ORIENTATION OF THE MAP
The orientation of the map can be
changed between 2D north-up, 2D
heading-up and 3D heading-up by selecting the orientation symbol displayed at the top left of the screen.
1
Select
,
North-up screen
Heading-up screen
3D screen
306
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
or
.
: North-up symbol
Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel, north is always up.
: Heading-up symbol
The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
: 3D Heading-up symbol
The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
 The letter(s) beside this symbol indicate
the vehicle’s heading direction (e.g. N for
north).
1. BASIC OPERATION
SWITCHING THE MAP MODE
1
2
3
■MAP ONLY
Select “Options” on the map screen.
Select “Map Mode”.
Select the desired configuration button.
■DUAL MAP
No.
Function
Page
Select to display the single
map screen.
307
Select to display the dual
map screen.
307
Select to display the compass mode screen.
308
Select to display the turn list
screen.
337
Select to display the freeway exit list screen.
335
Select to display the intersection guidance screen or
the guidance screen on the
freeway.
336
Select to display the turnby-turn arrow screen.
337
 The map on the left is the main map.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
 Depending on the conditions, certain
screen configuration buttons cannot be
selected.
307
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC OPERATION
■COMPASS
Editing right map
The right side map can be edited.
1
2
Select any point on the right side map.
Information about the destination, current position and a compass is displayed on the screen.
Select the desired item.
No.
Function
Page
Select to change the orientation of the map.
306
Select to display POI icons.
310
Select to show traffic information.
314
Select to change the map
scale.
305
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.
308
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
INFORMATION
● The destination mark is displayed in the
direction of the destination. When driving, refer to the longitude and latitude
coordinates, and the compass, to make
sure that the vehicle is headed in the
direction of the destination.
● When the vehicle travels out of the coverage area, the guidance screen
changes to the whole compass mode
screen.
1. BASIC OPERATION
SCREEN SCROLL
OPERATION
Use the scroll feature to move the desired point to the center of the screen
for looking at a point on the map that is
different from the current position.
ADJUSTING LOCATION IN
SMALL INCREMENTS
The cursor location can be adjusted in
small increments when “Adjust Location” is selected on the setting map
screen.
Also, when changing the location of
memory points on the editing screen
(→P.350) and adjusting the current position mark manually on the “Calibration” screen (→P.355), 8 directional
arrows may appear for this purpose.
1
No.
Information/Function
Select one of the 8 directional arrows
to move the cursor to the desired point
and then select “OK”.
Cursor mark
Distance from the current position to
the cursor mark.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to set as a destination.
When selecting “Go to
” on the
following map screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the
route. (→P.329)
If a destination has already been set,
“Go to ” and “Add to Route” will
be displayed.
“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new
one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a
destination.
Select to register as a memory point.
To change the icon, name, etc.:
→P.348
Select to return to the current position.
 To scroll over the map screen, place the
cursor mark in the desired position and
then touch and hold the map screen. The
map will continue scrolling in that direction
until the finger is released.
309
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC OPERATION
3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION
SELECTING THE POI ICONS
DISPLAYING MAP
INFORMATION
Information such as POI icons, route
trace, speed limit, etc. can be displayed on the map screen.
1
2
3
1
Display the “Map Information” screen.
(→P.310)
2
Select “Select POI”.
Select “Options” on the map screen.
 When the POI icons to be displayed on
the map screen have already been set,
“Change POI” is displayed.
Select “Map Information”.
3
Select the desired items to be displayed.
Select the desired POI category and
select “OK”.
No.
No.
Function
Page
Select to display the selected POI icons.
⎯
Select to select or change
POI icons.
310
Select
trace.
to
display
route
312
Select to display speed limit
icon.
⎯
Select to display traffic information.
314
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.
310
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Information/Function
Page
Displays up to 5 selected
POI icons on the map
screen
−
Select to cancel the selected POI icons.
−
Displays up to 6 POI icons
as favorite POI categories
354
Select to display other POI
categories if the desired
POIs cannot be found on
the screen.
311
Select to search for the
nearest POIs.
311
1. BASIC OPERATION
■SELECTING OTHER POI ICONS TO
■DISPLAYING THE LOCAL POI LIST
BE DISPLAYED
1
2
Select “Other POIs”.
Select the desired POI categories and
select “OK”.
“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories. To add more POI categories, select “More”.
POIs that are within 20 miles (32 km) of
the current position will be listed from
among the selected categories.
1
2
Select “Find Local POI”.
Select the desired POI.
“Near...”: Select to search for POIs near
the current position or along the route.
3
Check that the selected POI is displayed on the map screen. (→P.309)
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
When “Near...” is selected
1
Select the desired item.
“Near Here”: Select to search for POIs
near the current position.
“Along My Route”: Select to search for
POIs along the route.
311
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC OPERATION
ROUTE TRACE
The traveled route can be stored and
retraced on the map screen. This feature is available when the map scale is
30 miles (50 km) or less.
1
Display the “Map Information” screen.
(→P.310)
2
Select “Route Trace”.
DISPLAYING INFORMATION
ABOUT THE ICON WHERE
THE CURSOR IS SET
When the cursor is placed over an icon
on the map screen, the name bar is
displayed on the upper part of the
screen. If “Info” appears on the right
side of the name bar, detailed information can be displayed.
 The “Route Trace” indicator illuminates
and the route trace starts.
1
Place the cursor over an icon.
3
2
Select “Info”.
Check that the traveled line is displayed.
■STOP RECORDING THE ROUTE
POI information
TRACE
1
2
Select “Route Trace” again.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
“Yes”: Select to keep the recorded
route trace.
“No”: Select to erase the recorded
route trace.
INFORMATION
● The traveled route can be stored up to
124 miles (200 km).
312
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Memory point information
1. BASIC OPERATION
Destination information
STANDARD MAP ICONS
Icon
Name
Island
Park
No.
Function
Industry
Select to register as a memory point.
To change the icon, name, etc.:
→P.348
Business facility
Select to set as a destination.
Airport
Select to call the registered number.
Select to delete destination or memory point.
Select to display the edit memory
point screen.
University
Hospital
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● Even when traffic information is not currently being received, traffic information
and “Info” will be displayed for a while
after traffic information has been
received.
Military
Stadium
Shopping mall
Golf
313
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. BASIC OPERATION
4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Traffic data can be received via HD or
Entune App Suite to display traffic information on the map screen.
1
A list of current traffic information can
be displayed along with information on
the incident’s distance and position relative to the vehicle.
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC
INFORMATION
1
Display the “Traffic
screen. (→P.314)
2
3
Select “Traffic Event List”.
Select the desired item.
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.
4
Function
Page
Select to display a list of
current traffic information.
314
Select to display a map
with predictive traffic data.
315
Select to display traffic
along the saved routes.
315
314
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Select the desired traffic information.
“On Current Road”: Select to display traffic information for the current road.
“On Current Route”: Select to display
traffic information for the set route.
Select “Traffic”.
No.
Information”
Check that the traffic information is displayed.
“Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic
information.
1. BASIC OPERATION
DISPLAYING PREDICTIVE
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
A map with predictive traffic data can
be displayed.
1
2
3
Display the “Traffic
screen. (→P.314)
Information”
MY TRAFFIC ROUTES
Traffic information along the saved
routes can be displayed. To use this
function, it is necessary to register a
route. (→P.359)
1
Display the “Traffic
screen. (→P.314)
2
Select “My Traffic Routes”.
Select “Predictive Traffic Map”.
Scroll the map to the desired point and
set the time of predictive traffic information.
 If map data has been updated, a confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “OK”
or “Do Not Tell Me Again”.
3
 The time of the predictive traffic information can be displayed in 15-minute steps
up to +45 minutes.
“ ”: Moves the time back 15 minutes.
Select the desired route.
8
“Options”: Select to add, edit or delete
personal routes.(→P.359)
 If routes have not been registered yet, a
confirmation screen will be displayed.
Select “Yes” to register the route.
4
5
Select the desired traffic information.
Check that the traffic information is displayed.
“Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic
information.
315
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“ ”: Moves the time forward 15 minutes.
Information”
1. BASIC OPERATION
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC
INFORMATION ON THE MAP
1
2
3
Select “Options” on the map screen.
Select “Map Information”.
Select “Traffic Information”.
No.
Information/Function
The icons show traffic incident, road
repair, traffic obstacles, etc. Select to
display traffic information and start
voice guidance for the traffic information.
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.
The color of the arrow changes depending on the traffic information received.
4
The indicator is displayed as follows.
Check that the traffic information is displayed.
: Traffic information has
been received.
: Traffic information has
been received via HD Radio broadcast.
No icon: Traffic information has not
been received.
INFORMATION
● Traffic information may take some time
to load after the system is turned on.
316
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
1. DESTINATION SEARCH SCREEN
The “Destination” screen enables to search for a destination. To display the “Destination” screen, press the “APPS” button, and select “Navigation” on the “Apps”
screen. Then select “Dest.” on the map screen.
8
Function
Page
Select to search for a destination by address.
321
Select to search for a destination by point of interest.
322
Select to search for a destination from previously set destinations.
325
Select to search for a destination from a registered entry in “Address
book”.
325
Select to search for a destination by online database.
377
Select to search for a destination from emergency service points.
326
Select to search for a destination by intersection or freeway entrance/
exit.
326
Select to search for a destination by the last displayed map.
328
Select to search for a destination by coordinates.
328
Select to set a destination by home.
320
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
317
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
No.
Function
Page
Select to set a destination from preset destinations.
320
Select to delete set destinations.
340
318
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
2. SEARCH OPERATION
1
Press the “APPS” button.
5
2
Select “Navigation”.
3
4
Select “Dest.”.
Select to adjust the position in smaller increments. (→P.309)
Search for a destination.
Select to register as a memory point.
Select “Go” when the confirm destination screen is displayed.
No.
Function
Select to call the registered number.
319
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
 There are different kinds of methods to
search for a destination. (→P.317)
Select to search for the route.
(→P.329)
If a destination has already been
set, “Go Directly” and “Add to
Route” will be displayed.
“Go Directly”: Select to delete the
existing destination(s) and set a new
one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a
destination.
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SELECTING SEARCH AREA
The selected state (province) can be
changed to set a destination from a
different state (province) by using
“Address”, “Point of Interest” or
“Intersection & Freeway”.
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
Select “Address”, “Point of Interest”
or “Intersection & Freeway”.
3
Select “Select State/Province” or
“Change State/Province”.
“Destination”
screen.
 If a state (province) has not been selected
yet, “Select State/Province” is displayed.
4
Select the desired state (province).
SETTING HOME AS
DESTINATION
To use this function, it is necessary to
register a home address. (→P.345)
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
Select “Go Home”.
“Destination”
screen.
 The navigation system performs a search
for the route and the entire route map is
displayed. (→P.329)
SETTING PRESET
DESTINATIONS AS
DESTINATION
To use this function, it is necessary to
register preset destinations to the
preset screen buttons (1-5). (→P.346)
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
Select any of the preset destination
buttons (1-5).
“Destination”
screen.
 To change countries, select the “United
States”, “Canada” or “Mexico” tab.
 For map database information and
updates: →P.365
 The navigation system performs a search
for the route and the entire route map is
displayed. (→P.329)
320
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY STREET
ADDRESS
SEARCHING BY ADDRESS
There are 2 methods to search for a
destination by address.
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
3
Select “Address”.
“Destination”
screen.
Select the desired search method.
1
2
Select “Street Address”.
3
4
5
6
Enter a street name and select “OK”.
Enter a house number and select
“OK”.
Select the desired street name.
Enter a city name and select “OK”.
Select the desired city name.
 If the same address exists, the address
list screen will be displayed. Select the
desired address.
INFORMATION
No.
Function
Page
321
Select to search by street
address.
321
SEARCHING BY CITY
1
2
Select “City”.
Enter a city name and select “OK”.
“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name from
the list of the last 5 cities.
3
4
5
6
Select the desired city name.
Enter a street name and select “OK”.
Select the desired street name.
Enter a house number and select
“OK”.
 If the same address exists, the address
list screen will be displayed. Select the
desired address.
321
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to search by city.
● A street name can be searched using
only the body part of its name.
For example: S WESTERN AVE
• A search can be performed by entering
“S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE”
or “WESTERN”.
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY POINT OF
INTEREST
There are 3 methods to search for a
destination by Points of Interest.
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
3
Select “Point of Interest”.
“Destination”
SEARCHING BY NAME
1
2
3
Select “Name”.
Enter a POI name and select “OK”.
Select the desired POI.
screen.
Select the desired search method.
No.
No.
Function
Page
Select to search by name.
322
Select to search by category.
323
Select to search by phone
number.
324
322
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Function
Page
Select to search for POI in
the desired city.
323
Select to search for POI
from the category list.
323
 When entering the name of a specific POI,
and there are 2 or more sites with the
same name, the list screen will be displayed. Select the desired POI.
INFORMATION
● To search for a facility name using multiple search words, put a space between
each word.
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
■SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH
1
2
Select “City”.
Enter a city name and select “OK”.
“Any City”: Select to cancel the city setting.
3
4
SEARCHING BY CATEGORY
1
2
Select “Category”.
Select the desired search point.
Select the desired city name.
Select the desired POI.
■SELECTING FROM THE CATEGORIES
1
2
Select “Category”.
No.
Select the desired category.
Function
Select to set the search point from
near the current position.
Select to search for POIs along the
set route.
Select to set the search point from
near a city center. (→P.324)
Select to set the search point from
near a destination.
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
 If there is more than 1 detailed item of the
selected category, the detailed list will be
displayed.
Select the desired POI category.
“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories.
3
Select the desired POI.
 If there is more than 1 detailed item of the
selected category, the detailed list will be
displayed.
“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories.
“Favorite POI Categories”: Select to use
the 6 POIs that have been previously
set.(→P.354)
4
Select the desired POI.
323
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY PHONE
NUMBER
INFORMATION
● The names of POIs located within
approximately 200 miles (320 km) from
the selected search point can be displayed.
When “Near a City Center in XX*” is selected
1
2
1
2
Select “Phone #”.
Enter a phone number and select
“OK”.
 If there is more than 1 site with the same
number, the list screen will be displayed.
Select “Near a City Center in XX”.
Enter a city name and select “OK”.
“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name from
the list of the last 5 cities.
3
4
Select the desired city name.
5
Follow the steps from 3 onward in
“SEARCHING
BY
CATEGORY”.
(→P.323)
Select “OK” when the city center map
screen is displayed.
*: XX represents the selected search
area name.
INFORMATION
● If the navigation system has never been
used, selecting the city name from “Last
5 Cities” will not be available.
324
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
INFORMATION
● If there is no match for the entered
phone number, a list of identical numbers with different area codes will be displayed.
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING FROM
PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
3
Select “Previous Destinations”.
“Destination”
screen.
Select the desired destination.
“Previous Start Point”: Select to display
the start point map of the previous guided
route.
“Delete”: Select to delete the previous
destination. (→P.352)
SEARCHING BY ADDRESS
BOOK
To use this function, it is necessary to
register an address book entry.
(→P.348)
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
3
Select “Address Book”.
“Destination”
screen.
Select the desired address book entry.
 “Options”: Select to register or edit
address book entries. (→P.348)
8
INFORMATION
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
● The previous start point and up to 100
previously set destinations are displayed
on the screen.
325
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY
EMERGENCY
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
3
Select “Emergency”.
“Destination”
SEARCHING BY
INTERSECTION AND
FREEWAY
screen.
Select the desired emergency category.
4
There are 2 methods to search for a
destination by Intersection & Freeway.
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
3
Select “Intersection & Freeway”.
“Destination”
screen.
Select the desired method.
Select the desired destination.
INFORMATION
● The navigation system does not guide in
areas where route guidance is unavailable. (→P.364)
326
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
No.
Function
Page
Select to search by intersection.
327
Select to search by freeway entrance/exit.
327
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY
INTERSECTION
1
2
Select “Intersection”.
3
SEARCHING BY FREEWAY
ENTRANCE/EXIT
1
2
Select “Freeway Entrance / Exit”.
3
4
Select the desired freeway.
Select the desired street name.
4
Enter the name of the second intersecting street and select “OK”.
5
5
Enter a freeway entrance or exit name
and select “OK”.
Select the desired street name.
6
Select the desired entrance or exit
name.
Enter the name of the first intersecting
street which is located near the destination and select “OK”.
 If the 2 streets cross at more than 1 intersection in a city, the list of intersections will
be displayed.
Enter a freeway name and select
“OK”.
Select “Entrance” or “Exit”.
327
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● Be sure to use the complete name of the
freeway or highway, including the
hyphen, when entering the destination.
Freeways and interstates use an “I” (I405). US highways use the state designation before the number (CA-118).
8
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY MAP
SEARCHING BY
COORDINATES
By selecting “Map” the last displayed
location is displayed again on the map
screen. You can search for a destination from this map.
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
3
Select “Map”.
“Destination”
screen.
Scroll the map to the desired point and
select “Go to ”.
“Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the
position in smaller increments. (→P.309)
 If a destination has already been set, “Go
to
” and “Add to Route” will be displayed.
“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing
destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.
 The navigation system performs a search
for the route and the entire route map is
displayed. (→P.329)
328
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1
Display the
(→P.319)
2
3
Select “Coordinates”.
“Destination”
screen.
Enter the latitude and longitude and
select “OK”.
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
3. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE
When the destination is set, the entire
route map from the current position to
the destination is displayed.
STARTING ROUTE
GUIDANCE
1
Select “OK” to start guidance.
No.
Select the desired route from 3 possible routes. (→P.330)
change
the
● Be sure to obey traffic regulations and
keep road conditions in mind while driving. If a traffic sign on the road has been
changed, the route guidance may not
indicate such changed information.
INFORMATION
Information/Function
Select to
(→P.331)
WARNING
route.
Current position
Destination point
Type of route and its distance
Distance of the entire route
Select to start guidance.
If “OK” is selected and held until a
beep sounds, demo mode will start.
Press the “HOME” or “APPS” button to end demo mode.
329
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to display a list of the turns required to reach the destination.
(→P.331)
● The route for returning may not be the
same as that for going.
● The route guidance to the destination
may not be the shortest route or a route
without traffic congestion.
● Route guidance may not be available if
there is no road data for the specified
location.
● When setting the destination on a map
with a scale more than 0.5 mile (800 m),
the map scale changes to 0.5 miles (800
m) automatically. If this occurs, set the
destination again.
● If a destination that is not located on a
road is set, the vehicle will be guided to
the point on a road nearest to the destination. The road nearest to the selected
point is set as the destination.
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
3 ROUTES SELECTION
■DISPLAYING 3 ROUTES INFORMATION
1
2
Select “3 Routes”.
Select the desired route.
No.
1
2
Select “Info”.
Check that the “3 Route Information”
screen is displayed.
Function
Select to display the quickest route.
No.
Information
Select to display the route that is the
shortest distance to the set destination.
Time necessary for the entire trip
Select to display the alternative
route.
Distance of the toll road
Select to display the information
about the 3 routes. (→P.330)
Distance of the freeway
Distance of the entire trip
Distance of the ferry trip
330
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
DISPLAYING TURN LIST
A list of turn information from the current position to the destination can be
displayed.
1
2
Select “Turn List”.
Check that the turn list is displayed.
No.
Information
EDITING ROUTE
Destinations can be added, reordered
or deleted, and conditions for the route
to the destination can be changed.
1
2
Select “Edit Route”.
Select the desired item.
Function
Page
Current position
Select to add destinations.
340
Distance to the next turn
Select to delete destinations.
340
Select to reorder destinations.
340
Select to set route preferences.
341
Select to change route
type.
341
Turn direction at the intersection
INFORMATION
● However, not all road names on the
route may appear on the list. If a road
changes its name without requiring a
turn (such as on a street that runs
through 2 or more cities), the name
change will not appear on the list. The
street names will be displayed in order
from the starting point, along with the
distance to the next turn.
8
INFORMATION
● Even if the “Freeways” indicator is
dimmed, the route cannot avoid including a freeway in some cases. (→P.341)
● If the calculated route includes a trip by
ferry, the route guidance shows a sea
route. After traveling by ferry, the current
position may be incorrect. Upon reception of GPS signals, it is automatically
corrected.
331
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to display the map of the selected point.
No.
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
PAUSING GUIDANCE
1
2
Select “Options” on the map screen.
Select “Pause Guidance”.
RESUMING GUIDANCE
1
Select “Resume Guidance”.
332
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN
During the route guidance, various
types of guidance screens can be displayed depending on conditions.
SCREEN FOR ROUTE
GUIDANCE
CHANGING ROUTE
INFORMATION BAR
When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the route information bar displays the current street name or the
distance with the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination.
1
Select the route information bar (
) or
the route information button ( ) to
change the display of the route information bar.
No.
Information/Function
Distance to the next turn and an arrow indicating the turning direction
Guidance route
Current position
INFORMATION
● If the vehicle goes off the guidance
route, the route is searched again.
● For some areas, the roads have not
been completely digitized in our database. For this reason, the route guidance may select a road that should not
be traveled on.
● When arriving at the set destination the
destination name will be displayed on
the upper part of the screen.
8
Information/Function
Select to change the display between the estimated travel time and
the estimated arrival time.
Select to change the display between the current street name and
the distance with the estimated travel/arrival time.
INFORMATION
● When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the distance measured along the
route is displayed. Travel time and
arrival time are calculated based on the
average speed for the specified speed
limit.
● When the vehicle gets off the guidance
route, the arrow facing the destination is
displayed instead of the estimated
travel/arrival time.
● The route information bar fills from left to
right as the vehicle progresses on the
route.
333
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Current street name or route information
No.
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
DISTANCE AND TIME TO
DESTINATION
When driving on the guidance route
with more than 1 destination set, a list
of the distance with estimated travel/
arrival time from the current position to
each destination is displayed.
1
2
Select the route information bar.
Check that the list of the distance and
time is displayed.
ROUTE OVERVIEW
The entire route from the current position to the destination can be displayed
during the route guidance.
1
2
3
Select “Options” on the map screen.
Select “Route Overview”.
Check that the entire route map is displayed.
 For details about this screen: →P.329
 By selecting one of the number buttons,
the desired route information is displayed.
334
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
DURING FREEWAY DRIVING
During freeway driving, the freeway
exit information screen will be displayed.
No./
Icon
Information/Function
Distance and time from the current
position to the freeway exit/rest area.
Name of the freeway exit/rest area.
POIs that are close to a freeway exit.
Select to display the nearest freeway exit/rest area from the current
position.
When the vehicle approaches an exit
or junction, the freeway guidance
screen will be displayed.
No.
Information/Function
Next exit or junction name
Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction
Select to hide the freeway guidance
screen. To return to the freeway
guidance screen, select
.
Remaining distance bar to the guidance point
Select to scroll to farther freeway
exit/rest area.
Select to scroll to closer freeway
exit/rest area.
335
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to display the selected map of
the exit vicinity.
WHEN APPROACHING
FREEWAY EXIT OR JUNCTION
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
TOLLGATE GUIDANCE
When the vehicle approaches a tollgate, the tollgate view will be displayed.
No.
WHEN APPROACHING
INTERSECTION
When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the intersection guidance
screen will be displayed.
Information/Function
Distance from the current position to
the tollgate
No.
Information/Function
Next street name
Select to hide the tollgate guidance
screen. To return to the tollgate
guidance screen, select
.
Remaining distance bar to the guidance point
Distance to the intersection
Select to hide the intersection guidance screen. To return to the intersection guidance screen, select
.
Remaining distance bar to the guidance point
336
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
TURN LIST SCREEN
1
2
Select “Turn List” on the “Map Mode”
screen. (→P.307)
Check that the turn list screen is displayed.
No.
TURN-BY-TURN ARROW
SCREEN
On this screen, information about the
next turn on the guidance route can be
displayed.
1
Select “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” on the
“Map Mode” screen. (→P.307)
2
Check that the turn-by-turn arrow
screen is displayed.
Information/Function
Turn direction
Distance between turns
Next street or destination name
No.
Information/Function
8
Exit number or street name
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Turn direction
Distance to the next turn
337
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS
As the vehicle approaches an intersection, or point, where maneuvering the
vehicle is necessary, the system’s
voice guidance will provide various
messages.
WARNING
● Be sure to obey the traffic regulations
and keep the road condition in mind
especially when you are driving on IPD
roads. The route guidance may not have
the updated information such as the
direction of a one way street.
INFORMATION
● If a voice guidance command cannot be
heard, select
on the map screen
to hear it again.
● To adjust the voice guidance volume:
→P.66
● Voice guidance may be made early or
late.
● If the system cannot determine the current position correctly, you may not hear
voice guidance or may not see the magnified intersection on the screen.
338
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3. EDITING ROUTE
1
Press the “APPS” button.
5
Select the item to be set.
No.
Function
Page
2
Select “Navigation”.
Select to add destinations.
340
3
4
Select “Options”.
Select to delete destinations.
340
Select to reorder destinations.
340
Select to set route preferences.
341
Select to change route
type.
341
Select to set detours.
342
Select “Edit Route”.
8
Check that the entire route map is displayed. (→P.329)
339
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
ADDING DESTINATIONS
1
Display the
(→P.339)
2
3
Select “Add”.
4
“Edit
Route”
DELETING DESTINATIONS
screen.
Search for an additional destination in
the same way as a destination search.
(→P.317)
Select “Add Destination Here” to insert the new destination into the route.
1
Display the
(→P.339)
2
3
Select “Delete”.
“Edit Route”
screen.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
 When more than 1 destination has been
set, a list will be displayed on the screen.
Select the item(s) to be deleted.
“Delete All”: Select to delete all destinations on the list.
 If more than 1 destination has been set,
the system will recalculate the route(s) to
the set destination(s) as necessary.
REORDERING
DESTINATIONS
When more than 1 destination has
been set, the arrival order of the destinations can be changed.
1
Display the
(→P.339)
2
3
Select “Reorder”.
“Edit
Route”
screen.
Select the desired destination and select “Move Up” or “Move Down” to
change the arrival order. Then select
“OK”.
340
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
SETTING ROUTE
PREFERENCES
SELECTING ROUTE TYPE
The conditions to determine the route
can be selected from various choices
such as freeways, toll roads, ferries,
etc.
1
Display the
(→P.339)
2
3
Select “Preferences”.
“Edit
Route”
1
Display the
(→P.339)
2
3
Select “Route Type”.
“Edit
Route”
screen.
Select the desired route type.
screen.
Select the desired route preferences
and select “OK”.
 During driving, the route guidance starts
after selecting the desired route type.
4
The entire route from the starting point
to the destination is displayed.
 For details about this screen: →P.329
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.
341
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3
DETOUR SETTING
Select the desired detour distance.
During the route guidance, the route
can be changed to detour around a
section of the route where a delay is
caused by road repairs, an accident,
etc.
1
2
Display the
(→P.339)
“Edit
Select “Detour”.
Route”
screen.
No.
Function
Select to detour within 1 mile of the
current position.
Select to detour within 3 miles of the
current position.
Select to detour within 5 miles of the
current position.
Select to detour on the entire route.
Select to make the system search
for the route based on traffic congestion information received from
traffic information. (→P.314)
342
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
INFORMATION
● This picture shows an example of how
the system would guide around a delay
caused by a traffic jam.
This position indicates the location of a
traffic jam caused by road repairs, an
accident, etc.
This route indicates the detour suggested by the system.
● When the vehicle is on a freeway, the
detour distance selections are 5, 15 and
25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units are
in km).
● The system may not be able to calculate
a detour route depending on the
selected distance and surrounding road
conditions.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
343
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. MEMORY POINTS
1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS
Home, preset destinations, address
book entries, areas to avoid can be set
as memory points. The registered
points can be used as the destinations.
(→P.317)
4
Select the desired item to be set.
Registered areas to avoid, will be
avoided when the system searches for
a route.
1
2
3
Press the “APPS” button.
Select “Setup”.
Select “Navigation”.
344
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
No.
Function
Page
Select to set home.
345
Select to set preset destinations.
346
Select to set the address
book.
348
Select to set areas to
avoid.
350
Select to delete previous
destinations.
352
Select to set detailed navigation settings.
353
4. MEMORY POINTS
EDITING HOME
SETTING UP HOME
If home has been registered, that information can be recalled by selecting
“Go Home” on the “Destination”
screen. (→P.320)
1
Display the “Navigation
screen. (→P.344)
2
3
Select “Home”.
1
2
Select “Edit”.
Select the desired item to be edited.
Settings”
Select the desired item to be set.
No.
No.
Function
Page
345
Select to edit home.
345
Select to delete home.
345
3
Select “Set Home”.
3
Select “OK” when the editing home
screen appears.
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.317)
Select to edit the home
name.
350
Select to set display of the
home name on/off.
⎯
Select to edit location information.
350
Select to edit the phone
number.
350
Select to change the icon
to be displayed on the map
screen.
349
Select “OK”.
DELETING HOME
REGISTERING HOME
1
2
Page
1
2
Select “Delete”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
345
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to register home.
Function
4. MEMORY POINTS
REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
SETTING UP PRESET
DESTINATIONS
If a preset destination has been registered, that information can be recalled
by using preset destinations on the
“Destination” screen. (→P.320)
1
Display the “Navigation
screen. (→P.344)
2
3
Select “Preset Destinations”.
1
2
Select “Set”.
3
Select a position for this preset destination.
4
Select “OK” when the editing preset
destination screen appears. (→P.347)
Settings”
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.317)
Select the desired item.
INFORMATION
No.
Function
Page
Select to register a preset
destination.
346
Select to edit a preset destination.
347
Select to delete a preset
destination.
347
346
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
● Up to 5 preset destinations can be registered.
4. MEMORY POINTS
EDITING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
1
2
3
Select “Edit”.
Select the desired preset destination.
1
2
Select “Delete”.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Select the item to be edited.
No.
Function
Page
Select to edit the preset
destination name.
350
Select to set display of the
preset destination name
on/off.
⎯
Select to edit location information.
350
Select to edit the phone
number.
350
Select to change the icon
to be displayed on the map
screen.
349
Select the preset destination to be deleted and select “Delete”.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4
DELETING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
Select “OK”.
347
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. MEMORY POINTS
EDITING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES
SETTING UP ADDRESS
BOOK
Points on the map can be registered.
1
Display the “Navigation
screen. (→P.344)
2
3
Select “Address Book”.
Settings”
1
2
3
Select the desired item.
No.
The icon, name, location and/or phone
number of a registered address book
entry can be edited.
Function
Page
Select to register address
book entries.
Select “Edit”.
Select the desired address book entry.
Select the item to be edited.
No.
Function
Page
348
Select to edit the address
book entry name.
350
Select to edit address book
entries.
348
⎯
Select to delete address
book entries.
350
Select to set display of the
address book entry name
on/off.
Select to edit location information.
350
Select to edit the phone
number.
350
Select to change the icon
to be displayed on the map
screen.
349
REGISTERING ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRIES
1
2
Select “New”.
3
Select “OK” when the editing address
book entry screen appears. (→P.348)
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.317)
INFORMATION
● Up to 100 address book entries can be
registered.
348
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4
Select “OK”.
4. MEMORY POINTS
■CHANGING THE ICON
1
2
Select “Edit” next to the “Icon”.
Select the desired icon.
When the “With Sound” tab is selected
A sound for some address book entries
can be set. When the vehicle approaches the location of the address
book entry, the selected sound will be
heard.
1
2
Select the “With Sound” tab.
Select the desired sound icon.
: Select to play the sound.
 Change pages by selecting the “Page 1”,
“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.
“With Sound”: Select the memory points
with a sound
 When “Bell (with Direction)” is selected,
select an arrow to adjust the direction and
select “OK”.
8
349
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● The bell sounds only when the vehicle
approaches this point in the direction
that has been set.
4. MEMORY POINTS
■CHANGING THE NAME
1
2
Select “Edit” next to “Name”.
Enter a name and select “OK”.
■CHANGING THE LOCATION
1
2
Select “Edit” next to “Location”.
Scroll the map to the desired point
(→P.309) and select “OK”.
■CHANGING PHONE NUMBER
1
Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.
2
Enter the phone number and select
“OK”.
SETTING UP AREAS TO
AVOID
Areas to be avoided because of traffic
jams, construction work or other reasons can be registered as “Areas to
Avoid”.
1
Display the “Navigation
screen. (→P.344)
2
3
Select “Areas to Avoid”.
Settings”
Select the desired item.
DELETING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES
1
2
3
Select “Delete”.
Select the item to be deleted and select
“Delete”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
350
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
No.
Function
Page
Select to register areas to
avoid.
351
Select to edit areas to
avoid.
351
Select to delete areas to
avoid.
352
4. MEMORY POINTS
REGISTERING AREAS TO
AVOID
1
2
3
Select “New”.
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.317)
Select either
or
to
change the size of the area to be avoided and select “OK”.
EDITING AREAS TO AVOID
The name, location and/or area size of
a registered area can be edited.
1
2
3
Select “Edit”.
Select the area and select “OK”.
Select the item to be edited.
4
Select “OK” when the editing area to
avoid screen appears.
INFORMATION
● If a destination is entered in the area to
avoid or the route calculation cannot be
made without running through the area
to avoid, a route passing through the
area to be avoided may be shown.
● Up to 10 locations can be registered as
points/areas to avoid.
Function
Page
Select to edit the name of
the area to avoid.
352
Select to set display of the
area to avoid name on/off.
⎯
8
Select to edit area location.
352
Select to edit area size.
352
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
Select to set the area to
avoid function on/off.
4
⎯
Select “OK”.
351
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
4. MEMORY POINTS
■CHANGING THE NAME
1
2
Select “Edit” next to “Name”.
Enter a name and select “OK”.
DELETING AREAS TO AVOID
1
2
Select “Delete”.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
■CHANGING THE LOCATION
1
2
Select “Edit” next to “Location”.
Scroll the map to the desired point
(→P.309) and select “OK”.
■CHANGING THE AREA SIZE
1
Select “Edit” next to “Size”.
2
Select either
or
to
change the size of the area to be avoided and select “OK”.
352
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Select the area to be deleted and select “Delete”.
DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS
Previous destinations can be deleted.
1
Display the “Navigation
screen. (→P.344)
2
3
Select “Delete Previous Dest.”.
4
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Settings”
Select the previous destination to be
deleted and select “Delete”.
5. SETUP
1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS
Settings are available for pop-up information, favorite POI categories, low
fuel warning, etc.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
4
5
6
Select “Setup”.
SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS
Select “Navigation”.
Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”.
Select the items to be set.
Select “OK”.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
353
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
5. SETUP
No.
Function
Page
Select to set the voice guidance for the next street
name on/off.
⎯
Select to set IPD road guidance on/off.
⎯
Select to set favorite POI
categories that are used for
POI selection to display on
the map screen.
354
Select to adjust the current
position mark manually or
to adjust miscalculation of
the distance caused by tire
replacement.
355
Select to set display of popup information on/off.
⎯
Select to set display of low
fuel warning on/off.
356
Select to reset all setup
items.
⎯
FAVORITE POI CATEGORIES
(SELECT POI ICONS)
Up to 6 POI icons, which are used for
selecting POIs on the map screen, can
be selected as favorites.
1
Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”
screen. (→P.353)
2
3
Select “Favorite POI Categories”.
Select the category to be changed.
“Default”: Select to set the default categories.
4
Select the desired POI category.
“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories.
5
354
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Select the desired POI icon.
5. SETUP
CURRENT POSITION/TIRE
CHANGE CALIBRATION
The current position mark can be adjusted manually. Miscalculation of the
distance caused by tire replacement
can also be adjusted.
1
Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”
screen. (→P.353)
2
3
Select “Calibration”.
Select the desired item.
■POSITION/DIRECTION
CALIBRA-
TION
When driving, the current position
mark will be automatically corrected by
GPS signals. If GPS reception is poor
due to location, the current position
mark can be adjusted manually.
1
2
Select “Position / Direction”.
3
Select an arrow to adjust the direction
of the current position mark and select
“OK”.
Scroll the map to the desired point
(→P.309) and select “OK”.
 For additional information on the accuracy of a current position: →P.363
8
The tire change calibration function will
be used when replacing the tires. This
function will adjust miscalculation
caused by the circumference difference between the old and new tires.
1
Select “Tire Change”.
 The message appears and the quick distance calibration starts automatically.
INFORMATION
● If this procedure is not performed when
the tires are replaced, the current position mark may be incorrectly displayed.
355
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
■TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION
5. SETUP
LOW FUEL WARNING POP-UP
When the fuel level is low, a warning
message will pop up on the screen.
1
Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”
screen. (→P.353)
2
Select “Low Fuel Warning Pop-up”.
■SEARCHING GAS STATION IN LOW
FUEL WARNING
A nearby gas station can be selected
as a destination.
1
Select “Yes” when the low fuel warning appears.
2
Select the desired nearby gas station.
3
Select “Enter
tion.
” to set as a destina-
“Info”: Select to display gas station information. (→P.312)
356
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
5. SETUP
2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS
Traffic information such as traffic congestion or traffic incident warnings can
be made available.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
4
5
Select “Setup”.
SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC
SETTINGS
Select “Traffic”.
Select the items to be set.
Select “OK”.
No.
Function
Select to set the avoid traffic function auto/manual. (→P.358)
Select to set the usage of traffic information for the estimated arrival
time on/off.
Select to set the display of an arrow
of free flowing traffic on/off.
Select to set to on/off whether to
consider the predictive traffic information (→P.315) with estimated arrival time and detoured route
search.
Select to set of traffic incident voice
warning on/off.
Select to reset all setup items.
357
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to set specific routes (such as
frequently used routes) on which
you wish to receive traffic information. (→P.359)
5. SETUP
AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC
1
Display the “Traffic Settings” screen.
(→P.357)
2
3
Select “Avoid Traffic”.
Select the desired item.
No.
Function
Select to automatically change
routes when congestion information
of the guidance route has been received.
Select to select manually whether or
not to change routes when congestion information of the guidance
route has been received. In this
mode, a screen will appear to ask if
you wish to reroute.
Select to not reroute when congestion information for the guidance
route has been received.
4
Select “OK”.
358
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
■CHANGING THE ROUTE MANUALLY
When the navigation system calculates a new route, the following screen
will be displayed.
1
Select the desired item.
No.
Function
Select to start route guidance using
the new route.
Select to confirm the new route and
current route on the map.
Select to continue the current route
guidance.
5. SETUP
REGISTERING PERSONAL
ROUTES
MY TRAFFIC ROUTES
Specific routes (such as frequently
used routes) on which you wish to receive traffic information can be registered as “My Traffic Routes”. A route is
set by defining a start point and end
point, and can be adjusted by setting
up to 2 preferred roads.
1
Display the “Traffic Settings” screen.
(→P.357)
2
3
Select “My Traffic Routes”.
Select the desired item.
1
2
Select “New”.
3
4
5
Enter the name and select “OK”.
Select “Edit” next to “Name”.
Select “Edit” next to “Start”.
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.317)
8
Function
Page
Select to register personal
routes.
359
Select to edit personal
routes.
360
Select to delete personal
routes.
360
6
Select “Edit” next to “End”.
7
Select the desired item to search for
the location. (→P.317)
8
Select “OK” when the editing traffic
route screen appears.
 The routes can be adjusted by setting preferred roads. (→P.361)
INFORMATION
● Up to 5 routes can be registered.
359
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
5. SETUP
EDITING PERSONAL ROUTES
1
2
DELETING PERSONAL
ROUTES
Select “Edit”.
Select the desired traffic route.
3
1
2
Select “Delete”.
3
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
Select the traffic route to be deleted
and select “Delete”.
Select “Edit” next to the item to be edited.
No.
Function
Page
Select to edit the name of
the personal route.
Select to edit start location.
359
Select to edit end location.
Select to see and modify
the entire route.
4
361
Select “OK”.
 The entire route map will be displayed.
360
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
5. SETUP
SETTING PREFERRED ROADS
“My Traffic Routes” can be adjusted by
setting up to 2 preferred roads.
1
2
Select “Set Preferred Roads”.
■ADDING PREFERRED ROADS
1
Select “Add”.
 If two preferred roads are already set,
select “Yes” and delete a preferred road
before add a new one.
2
Scroll the map to the desired point and
select “OK”.
3
Select “OK” to use this road.
Select the desired item.
“Next”: Select to change road.
4
Select “Add Here” for the desired location.
8
Function
Page
Select to add preferred
roads.
361
Select to modify preferred
roads.
362
Select to delete preferred
roads.
362
 If a preferred road is already set, a second
preferred road can be added anywhere
between the start point, the end point and
the existing preferred road.
361
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
5. SETUP
■MODIFYING PREFERRED ROADS
■DELETING PREFERRED ROADS
1
2
Select “Modify”.
1
2
3
Scroll the map to the desired point and
select “OK”.
Select the preferred road to be modified if 2 preferred roads have been set.
4
Select “OK” to use this road.
362
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Select the preferred road to be deleted
if 2 preferred roads have been set.
“Delete All”: Select to delete all preferred
roads on the list.
3
“Next”: Select to change road.
Select “Delete”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
LIMITATIONS OF THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This navigation system calculates the
current position using satellite signals,
various vehicle signals, map data, etc.
However, an accurate position may not
be shown depending on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) developed and operated by the U.S. Department of Defense provides an accurate
current position, normally using 4 or more
satellites, and in some case 3 satellites.
The GPS system has a certain level of inaccuracy. While the navigation system
compensates for this most of the time, occasional positioning errors of up to 300 ft.
(100 m) can and should be expected. Generally, position errors will be corrected
within a few seconds.
When the vehicle is receiving signals from
satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at the
top left of the screen.
The GPS signal may be physically obstructed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position on the map screen. Tunnels, tall
buildings, trucks, or even the placement of
objects on the instrument panel may obstruct the GPS signals.
The GPS satellites may not send signals
due to repairs or improvements being
made to them.
Even when the navigation system is receiving clear GPS signals, the vehicle position may not be shown accurately or
inappropriate route guidance may occur in
some cases.
NOTICE
363
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
● The installation of window tinting may
obstruct the GPS signals. Most window
tinting contains some metallic content
that will interfere with GPS signal reception of the antenna in the instrument
panel. We advise against the use of window tinting on vehicles equipped with
navigation systems.
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
 Accurate current position may not be
shown in the following cases:
• When driving on a small angled Yshaped road.
• When driving on a winding road.
• When driving on a slippery road such as
in sand, gravel, snow, etc.
• When driving on a long straight road.
• When freeway and surface streets run in
parallel.
• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.
• When a long route is searched during
high speed driving.
• When driving without setting the current
position calibration correctly.
• After repeating a change of direction by
going forward and backward, or turning
on a turntable in a parking lot.
• When leaving a covered parking lot or
parking garage.
• When a roof carrier is installed.
• When driving with tire chains installed.
• When the tires are worn.
• After replacing a tire or tires.
• When using tires that are smaller or
larger than the factory specifications.
• When the tire pressure in any of the 4
tires is not correct.
 If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals, the current position can be
adjusted manually. For information on
setting the current position calibration:
→P.355
 Inappropriate route guidance may occur in
the following cases:
• When turning at an intersection off the
designated route guidance.
• If you set more than 1 destination but
skip any of them, auto reroute will display a route returning to the destination
on the previous route.
• When turning at an intersection for which
there is no route guidance.
• When passing through an intersection
for which there is no route guidance.
• During auto reroute, the route guidance
may not be available for the next turn to
the right or left.
• During high speed driving, it may take a
long time for auto reroute to operate. In
auto reroute, a detour route may be
shown.
• After auto reroute, the route may not be
changed.
• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or
announced.
• If a location has multiple names and the
system announces 1 or more of them.
• When a route cannot be searched.
• If the route to your destination includes
gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the
route guidance may not be shown.
• Your destination point might be shown
on the opposite side of the street.
• When a portion of the route has regulations prohibiting the entry of the vehicle
that vary by time or season or other reasons.
• The road and map data stored in the
navigation system may not be complete
or may not be the latest version.
 After replacing a tire: →P.355
INFORMATION
● This navigation system uses tire turning
data and is designed to work with factory-specified tires for the vehicle.
Installing tires that are larger or smaller
than the originally equipped diameter
may cause inaccurate display of the current position. The tire pressure also
affects the diameter of the tires, so make
sure that the tire pressure of all 4 tires is
correct.
364
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA
MAP INFORMATION
5
Check that the map data screen is displayed.
Coverage areas and legal information
can be displayed and map data can be
updated.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
No.
Function
Map version
Select to display map coverage areas.
Select to display legal information.
2
3
4
Select “Navigation”.
Select “Options”.
Select “Map Data”.
INFORMATION
● Map data updates are available for a
fee. Contact your Toyota dealer for further information.
8
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
365
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
ABOUT THE MAP DATA
Map data for the navigation system is
contained in a microSD card that is inserted in the microSD card slot.
Do not eject the microSD card, as doing so may deactivate the navigation
system.
NOTICE
● Do not edit or delete the map data on
the microSD card, as doing so may
deactivate the navigation system.
INFORMATION
● microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD3C,LLC.
366
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
9
1
Entune App Suite*
2
1
Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
3
1. Entune App Suite
SERVICE ................................... 368
4
BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ...... 370
2
PREPARATION BEFORE USING
Entune App Suite .............................. 371
5
Entune App Suite OPERATION
6
1. Entune App Suite ....................... 373
USING Entune App Suite..................... 373
7
LINKING Entune App Suite AND
NAVIGATION FUNCTION................. 377
Entune App Suite KEYWORD
OPERATION ..................................... 378
8
9
3
SETUP
1. Entune App Suite
SETTINGS................................. 380
*: Entune Premium Audio only
367
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
1. Entune App Suite SERVICE*
Entune App Suite is a service that enables downloadable applications to be displayed on and operated from the screen. Before Entune App Suite can be used, a
few actions need to be performed first. (→P.371)
*: Entune App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, D. C. and Alaska.
368
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
No.
Name
Function
Content provider
Provides content to the system via a cellular phone.
Application server
Provides downloadable application to the system via a cellular
phone.
Cellular phone*
Using the Entune App Suite application, communication is relayed between the system, the application server and the contents provider.
Applications
Downloaded Entune App Suite applications provide access to
audio/visual content from a content provider when connected
via a compatible phone with a data connection.
Entune App Suite
Contents received, via a cellular phone, from the contents provider servers are displayed on the screen. The system is
equipped with an application player to run applications.
*: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
INFORMATION
● The actual service availability is dependent on the network condition.
9
Entune App Suite
369
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
BEFORE USING THE
FUNCTION
SUBSCRIPTION
 User registration is required to start using
the Entune App Suite service.
 Entune App Suite does not require an activation fee or monthly recurring fees.
 Services requiring a separate contract can
also be used.*
*: For details, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/ or call
1-800-331-4331.
AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE
 Entune App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, D. C. and Alaska.
INFORMATION
● When using Entune App Suite, depending on the details of your cellular phone
contract, data usage fees may apply.
Confirm data usage fees before using
this service.
● In this section, the required actions to
activate applications, connect a cellular
phone to the system and registration
steps for Entune App Suite are
explained. For details regarding Entune
App Suite operations and each of the
applications, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
● The actual service availability is dependent on the network condition.
370
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
INITIALIZING PERSONAL
DATA
The personal data used in applications
can be removed from the system.
(→P.64)
 The following personal data can be
deleted from the system and returned to
their default settings:
• Downloaded applications
• Downloaded application content
INFORMATION
● Once initialized, data will be erased from
the system. Pay close attention when
initializing the data.
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
PREPARATION BEFORE
USING Entune App Suite
USER REGISTRATION
1
Perform user registration at
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
SETUP REQUIRED TO USE
Entune App Suite
Perform the following actions.
1
User registration
2
Download the Entune App Suite application to your cellular phone.
3
Register the cellular phone to the system.
4
Download Entune App Suite applications to the system.
In order to use Entune App Suite, the following actions must first be performed:
 User registration with a service contract
(→P.371)
 Download the Entune App Suite application onto your cellular phone, and login to
the application. (→P.372)
 Register the cellular phone that the
Entune App Suite application was downloaded to with the system. (→P.372)
9
Entune App Suite
 Register a Bluetooth® phone with the
hands-free system. (→P.44)
 Download Entune App Suite applications
to the system. (→P.374)
371
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1. Entune App Suite OVERVIEW
REGISTERING THE Entune App
Suite APPLICATION
1
Download the Entune App Suite application to your cellular phone.
2
Run the Entune App Suite application
on your cellular phone.
3
Enter the information required into the
Entune App Suite application. Login to
the application.
INFORMATION
● Applications can only be used when the
Entune App Suite application has been
downloaded to your cellular phone and
the application is running.
● Entune App Suite operational procedures can also be confirmed by visiting
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
● In order to use applications, it is necessary to run the Entune App Suite application on your cellular phone.
● For known phone compatibility information, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
● If an Entune App Suite application is
used while iPod audio is being played
back, system operation may become
unstable.
372
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
DOWNLOADING Entune App
Suite APPLICATIONS
1
The actions on P.371 need to be performed before Entune App Suite applications can be downloaded.
2
Once your phone is running the Entune
App Suite application with a valid account logged in and is connected to the
system, an on-screen pop-up will be
displayed offering to begin downloading Entune App Suite applications to
the system. After download has started, see P.375 for more information.
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
1. Entune App Suite
USING Entune App Suite
2
Select the desired application button.
Entune App Suite is a service that enables the usable contents of a cellular
phone to be displayed on and operated
from the screen. Before Entune App
Suite can be used, a few actions need
to be performed first. (→P.371)
For details about the function and
service of each application, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
No.
Function
Page
Select to activate an application.
⎯
Select to update the application.
374
Select to reorder the applications.
375
9
Entune App Suite
373
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
UPDATING AN APPLICATION
3
Check that downloading is completed.
When Entune App Suite is activated,
an application may need to be updated. By updating, an application can be
kept to the latest version. When updating the application, it is necessary to
download the updated data and install
it.
■DOWNLOADING THE UPDATED
DATA
If an update is available, “Update” can
be selected.
1
Select “Update”.
No.
Function
Select to install the update later. The
screen will return to the last displayed screen. Installing the updated data later: →P.375
Select to display detailed information about the updated data.
Select to install the updated data.
Follow the steps “INSTALLING THE
UPDATED DATA” from “STEP 2”.
(→P.375)
INFORMATION
2
Check that downloading is started.
“Download in Background”: Select to
operate other function while downloading.
“Cancel”: Select to cancel updating.
374
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
● Application download time may vary
based on the speed of the cellular network.
● Application download can be resumed
after turning off and back on.
● Future mandatory updates will display
an on-screen pop-up when available.
● Entune App Suite function cannot be
operated while mandatory updates
downloading.
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
■INSTALLING THE UPDATED DATA
After the downloading is complete,
“Update” will be changed to “Install”.
1
2
Select “Install”.
Select “Continue”.
“Later”: Select to postpone the installation
of the updated data and go back to the previous screen.
3
Check that installing is started.
“Install in Background”: Select to operate other function while installing.
4
REORDERING THE
APPLICATIONS
Order of the applications can be
changed.
1
2
Display the “Apps” screen. (→P.373)
3
Select the desired application to be
moved.
4
Select
or
to move the application, and select “OK”.
Select “Reorder”.
Select “OK” after the installing is complete.
9
INFORMATION
Entune App Suite
● Entune App Suite function cannot be
operated while installing.
375
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN
When problems occur starting up the application player, a message will appear on
the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested
corrective action. The following messages are only a few examples. If a message
other than the following is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the
screen.
Message
Display conditions
Corrective action
“The Phone is not connected.
For more information, please
visit toyota.com.”
The cellular phone cannot be
connected.
Refer
to
http://
www.toyota.com/entune/ to
confirm if the phone is compatible or not.
“To use the services, an active application needs to be
running on your phone. For
more information, please visit
toyota.com.”
The Entune App Suite application cannot be connected
to Bluetooth SPP.
Refer
to
http://
www.toyota.com/entune/ to
confirm if the phone is
Bluetooth SPP compatible
or not, and then activate the
Entune App Suite application.
INFORMATION
● The actual messages displayed on screen may differ from the messages in this manual.
376
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
SETTING A DESTINATION
USING Entune App Suite
LINKING Entune App Suite
AND NAVIGATION FUNCTION
The system can set a destination and
make a hands-free call via Entune App
Suite. For details about the function
and service of each application, refer
to http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
1
2
3
4
5
Press the “APPS” button.
Locations that were searched using
Entune App Suite can be set as a destination.
1
Display the “Web Search” screen.
(→P.377)
2
Select the desired application button to
search.
3
Enter a search term, and select “GO”.
4
5
Select “Map”.
6
Select “OK” to start guidance.
Select “Go to
”.
Select “Navigation”.
Select “Dest.”.
Select “Web Search”.
9
Entune App Suite
Check that the “Web Search” screen is
displayed.
 For the operation of the route guidance
screen and the function of each screen
button: →P.329
INFORMATION
● Actual sequence may vary based on the
application.
377
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
MAKING A PHONE CALL
USING Entune App Suite
Phone calls can be made to locations
which were searched using Entune
App Suite.
1
Display the “Web Search” screen.
(→P.377)
2
Select the desired application button to
search.
3
Enter a search term, and select “GO”.
4
5
Select “Call”.
Entune App Suite KEYWORD
OPERATION
Information can be entered to an application by the software keyboard or
voice recognition. For details about
the function and service of each application, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
 The keyboard layout can be changed.
(→P.59)
USING THE SOFTWARE
KEYBOARD
Select “Yes”.
“Cancel”: Select to cancel making a
phone call.
6
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
 For phone operation and the function of
each screen button: →P.272
INFORMATION
● Actual sequence may vary based on the
application.
378
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1
2
Display the “Apps” screen. (→P.373)
3
4
Select the character input space.
5
Entering characters will be reflected on
the character input space.
Select the desired application button.
Enter a search term, and then select
“OK”.
 For details on operating the keyboard:
→P.38
2. Entune App Suite OPERATION
ENTERING A KEYWORD USING
THE VOICE RECOGNITION
FUNCTION
1
2
Display the “Apps” screen. (→P.373)
3
4
Press the talk switch. (→P.168)
Select the desired application button.
Say the desired keyword.
 Completion of saying the keyword will be
detected automatically.
5
Search results will be displayed on the
screen.
9
Entune App Suite
379
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
3. SETUP
1. Entune App Suite SETTINGS
The phone data plan pop-up can be set
when a paid application is downloaded.
1
Press the “APPS” button.
2
3
4
Select “Setup”.
Select “Entune”.
Select the items to be set.
No.
Function
Select to set the pop up reminder for
cellular phone data usage.
Select to reset all setup items.
5
Select “OK”.
380
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
1
INDEX
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
381
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A
C
AAC........................................................ 100
AM............................................................ 83
APPS button ............................................ 12
“Apps” screen........................................... 14
AUDIO button........................................... 12
Audio settings ........................................ 120
AUX ........................................................ 116
Calling on the Bluetooth® phone............ 265
Casual speech recognization ................. 174
CD .......................................................... 100
Playing an audio CD........................... 102
Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC disc......... 102
Command list ......................................... 175
D
B
Bluetooth®................................................ 44
Profiles ................................................. 46
Registering a Bluetooth® audio
player ................................................ 45
Registering a Bluetooth® phone........... 44
Bluetooth® audio.................................... 111
Connecting a Bluetooth® device ........ 115
Listening to Bluetooth® audio............. 115
Bluetooth® phone................................... 260
Bluetooth® phone message function ..... 275
Buttons overview...................................... 12
Data services settings ............................ 185
Setting download methods ................. 185
Destination search screen...................... 317
Driver Easy Speak ................................. 186
Driver settings .......................................... 68
E
Editing route ........................................... 339
Adding destinations ............................ 340
Deleting destinations .......................... 340
Detour setting ..................................... 342
Reordering destinations...................... 340
Selecting route type............................ 341
Setting route preferences ................... 341
Emergency ............................................. 326
Entering letters and numbers/
list screen operation ............................. 38
Entering letters and numbers ............... 38
Entune App Suite ................................... 373
Entering keyword operation................ 378
Linking Entune App Suite and
navigation function .......................... 377
382
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
F
K
FM radio................................................... 83
Keyboard.................................................. 38
G
M
General settings....................................... 59
GPS (Global Positioning System).......... 363
Maintenance ............................................ 69
Map database version and
covered area ...................................... 365
Map screen information ......................... 310
Limitations of the navigation
system ............................................ 363
H
HOME button ........................................... 12
“Home” screen ......................................... 16
Home screen operation ........................... 37
I
Initial screen............................................. 32
Internet radio............................................ 99
Intuitive parking assist ........................... 250
Detection range of the sensors .......... 253
Display ............................................... 250
Intuitive parking assist
failure warning ................................ 255
Intuitive parking assist switch............. 250
Sensor detection information ............. 253
The distance display and buzzer........ 251
Types of sensors................................ 250
iPod........................................................ 107
Displaying information about
the icon where the cursor is set ...... 312
Standard map icons ........................... 313
Map screen operation ............................ 305
Adjusting location in small
increments ...................................... 309
Current position display...................... 305
Map scale ........................................... 305
Orientation of the map........................ 306
Screen scroll operation....................... 309
Switching the map mode .................... 307
Memory points settings .......................... 344
Deleting previous destinations ........... 352
Setting up address book..................... 348
Setting up areas to avoid.................... 350
Setting up home ................................. 345
Setting up preset destinations ............ 346
Microphone ............................................ 168
Mobile Assistant...................................... 178
MP3........................................................ 100
383
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
N
R
Navigation .............................................. 301
Rear seat entertainment system .............132
Changing the source ...........................136
O
Operating information ............................ 122
Playing a Blu-ray Disc™ (BD)/
DVD discs ........................................145
CD player and disc ............................. 123
Playing an audio CD............................158
Error messages .................................. 131
Playing an SD card..............................161
File information................................... 127
Playing MP3/WMA discs .....................158
iPod .................................................... 125
Remote controller ................................135
Radio .................................................. 122
Using the video mode..........................166
Rear view monitor system...................... 190
Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone ....... 271
Terms ................................................. 129
Camera switch..................................... 217
Incoming calls..................................... 271
Receiving traffic map information........... 184
Receiving weather information............... 182
Registering/connecting Bluetooth®
device ................................................... 44
Display................. 217, 221, 222, 225, 228
Certification........................................... 48
Magnifying function ............................. 235
Profiles.................................................. 46
Switching the display........................... 219
Registering a Bluetooth® audio player
for the first time ................................. 45
P
Panoramic view monitor.......................... 214
Camera................................................ 239
Things you should know...................... 247
Phonebook............................................. 267
Phone/message settings........................ 280
“Messaging Settings” screen.............. 290
Registering a Bluetooth® phone
for the first time ................................. 44
Registering home ..................................... 22
Registering preset destinations................ 24
Route guidance screen .......................... 333
“Phone Display Settings” screen ........ 291
During freeway driving........................ 335
Phone/message settings screen ........ 280
Route overview................................... 334
“Sound Settings” screen..................... 281
PWR·VOL knob ....................................... 12
Screen for route guidance .................. 333
“Contact/Call History Settings”
screen ............................................. 282
Turn list screen ................................... 337
Turn-by-turn arrow screen .................. 337
When approaching intersection .......... 336
Route trace............................................. 312
384
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
S
T
Satellite Radio.......................................... 93
Screen adjustment................................... 41
Search operation ................................... 319
Talking on the Bluetooth® phone ........... 272
Searching by address book................ 325
Incoming call waiting .......................... 274
Touch screen gestures ............................ 35
Touch screen operation ........................... 36
Toyota parking assist monitor ................ 198
Searching by coordinates................... 328
Driving precautions............................. 198
Searching by emergency ................... 326
Toyota parking assist monitor ............ 198
Searching by intersection and
freeway ........................................... 326
Screen display..................................... 200
Searching by address ........................ 321
Searching by map .............................. 328
Searching by point of interest............. 322
Switching the parking mode screen .... 202
Traffic information .................................. 314
Traffic settings........................................ 357
Searching from previous
destinations .................................... 325
Auto avoid traffic................................. 358
Selecting search area ........................ 320
Screen for traffic settings.................... 357
TUNE·SCROLL button............................. 12
Typical voice guidance prompts............. 338
Setting home as destination............... 320
Setting preset destinations
as destination ................................. 320
Setting Bluetooth® details........................ 51
“Bluetooth* Setup” screen .................... 51
Connecting a Bluetooth® device .......... 54
Deleting a Bluetooth® device ............... 53
Editing the Bluetooth® device
information........................................ 56
Registering a Bluetooth® device .......... 52
“System Settings” screen ..................... 57
Setting home as the destination .............. 27
“Setup” screen ......................................... 20
Starting route guidance.......................... 329
Steering switches................................... 118
My traffic routes.................................. 359
U
USB/AUX port .......................................... 80
USB memory.......................................... 103
Playing a USB audio .......................... 106
V
Voice command system......................... 168
Voice settings........................................... 66
W
WMA ...................................................... 100
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
385
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
X
XM Satellite Radio ................................... 93
Displaying the radio ID ......................... 97
How to subscribe to
an XM Satellite Radio ....................... 95
If the satellite radio tuner
malfunctions...................................... 98
Presetting a channel............................. 97
Selecting a channel from the list .......... 97
386
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Map database information and updates
387
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
388
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
B. VISA. With respect to any VISA data, VISA specifically requires the following:
i.) All materials are the copyrighted property of AISIN and/or TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, INC. and its licensors. No material from this site may be copied, reproduced, republished,
uploaded, posted, transmitted, stored, or distributed in any way, except that end user may download one listing (a location’s name and address) on an individual non-automated basis per visiting
session to the Licensee site or application, into end user’s personal electronic address book. A
personal electronic address book may not be shared by end user with other end users, nor may
it be copied, reproduced, republished, uploaded, posted, transmitted, stored or distributed in any
way. Use of the personal electronic address book must be for end user’s personal, noncommercial use only.
ii.) End user may not use any material from AISIN’s site or application for the purpose of compiling, enhancing, verifying, supplementing, or otherwise modifying VISA databases, lists, or directories of any kind, including, but not limited to, location databases, mailing lists, contact lists,
marketing lists, geographic directories, or any other compilation or collation of information which
is sold, rented, published, distributed, or in any manner supplied to a third party.
Certain business data provided by Infogroup © 2014, All Rights Reserved.
389
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Certification
 Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, “Powered by Gracenote”, MusicID, Playlist
Plus and MediaVOCS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc.
in the United States and/or other countries
390
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
391
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
For U.S. owners
392
HIGHLANDER_Navi_U
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement